CLC5000 REVISION 0 JAN.2001 FY8-13GZ-000 COPYRIGHT© 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 20000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
Application This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not apply to your locality. Corrections This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products.
INTRODUCTION 1 Symbols Used This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information: Symbol Description Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire). Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems. Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.
INTRODUCTION 2 Outline of the Manual This Service Manual contains basic facts and figures needed to service the machine, Paper Deck-J1/K1, Buffer Pass Unit-B1, conducted to ensure a high level of performance and expected functions. The following accessories come with separate service manuals or service informations; refer to them for details: 1. RDF-E3 2. Stapler Sorter-F2 3. Film Projector-E1 4. Editor-F1 5. ED Board-C1 6. Interface Board-E1 7.
INTRODUCTION The descriptions in this Service Manual are based on he following rules: 1. In each chapter, the uses of the function in question and its relationship to electrical and mechanical systems are discussed and the timing of operation of its associated parts is explained by means of outlines and diagrams. represents a mechanical path, while the symbol In the diagrams, the symbol with a name next to it indicates the flow of an electric signal.
INTRODUCTION System Configuration CLC5000 may be configured as follows: * Standard Film projector-E1 Copyboard cover* RDF-E3 Paper deck-J1 Editor-F1 Original tray* Main body Control card-V Paper deck-K1 Buffer pass unit-B1 Stapler sorter-F2 Accessary boards as follows: • ED board-C1 • Interface board-E1 • Preview monitor board iv COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
Main Body & Accessory COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 20000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CONTENTS Contents CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 Specifications ...................................... 1-1 1.1 Type ............................................ 1-1 1.2 Functions .................................... 1-2 1.3 Others ......................................... 1-4 1.3.1 Copier .................................. 1-4 1.4 Default Ratios ............................ 1-6 1.5 Copying Speed ........................... 1-7 2 Safety .................................................. 1-8 2.
CONTENTS 3.5.3 Removing the C Image Position 5.5 Duplex Unit .............................. 2-97 Correction Mirror Unit ...... 2-25 5.5.1 Outline ............................... 2-97 3.5.4 Mounting the C Image Position 5.5.2 Feeding in Duplex Mode ... 2-98 Correction Mirror Unit ...... 2-26 5.5.3 Sequence of Operations in 3.5.5 Removing the C Slant Duplex Mode (1st side) ... 2-100 Correction Motor ............... 2-27 5.5.4 Pickup from the Duplex 3.5.6 Removing the C Ratio Unit ...........................
CONTENTS 6.6.2 Detecting Overheating (hardware) ........................ 2-127 6.6.3 Detecting an Open Circuit in the Thermistor ............. 2-128 6.6.4 Detecting a Fault in the Triac ................................. 2-128 6.6.5 Detecting Overheating of Fixing Oil (software) ....... 2-128 6.6.6 Detecting Overheating of Fixing Oil (hardware) ...... 2-128 6.6.7 Detecting Low Temperature of Oil (software) ................... 2-129 6.6.8 Detecting Low Temperature of Oil (hardware) ..................
CONTENTS 9.6.1 Outline ................................... 2-227 9.7 Disassembly/Assembly .......... 2-228 9.7.1 External Covers ............... 2-229 9.7.2 Feeding System ............... 2-230 9.7.3 9.7.4 9.7.5 9.7.6 PCBs ................................ 2-244 Fans and Motors .............. 2-245 Sensors ............................. 2-249 Solenoids ......................... 2-253 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 1 Selecting the Site ................................
CONTENTS CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/ MALFUNCTIONS 1 Guide to Table ..................................... 5-1 1.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure ................................... 5-3 1.2 Points of the Scheduled Servicing .................................... 5-5 2 Standards and Adjustments ................. 5-7 2.1 Image-Related Parts ................... 5-7 2.1.1 Non-Image Width ................ 5-7 2.1.2 Image Margin ...................... 5-8 2.1.
CONTENTS 2.7.10 Adjusting the Pressure of the Paper Deck Separation/Feeding Roller ................................. 5-39 2.7.11 Positioning the Cassette Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL9, SL10) ....................... 5-39 2.7.12 Adjusting the Pressure of the Multifeeder Separation Roller ................................. 5-40 2.7.13 Adjusting the Position of the Multifeeder Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL5) .................................. 5-40 2.7.
CONTENTS 3.2.4 3-Color Gradation Scale .... 5-67 3.2.5 Halftone Band .................... 5-68 3.2.6 Fogging .............................. 5-68 3.3 Test Prints ................................ 5-70 3.3.1 Selecting a Test Pattern ...... 5-70 3.3.2 256-Color Test Print (PGTYPE=02) ................... 5-72 3.3.3 256-Gradation Test Print (PGTYPE=03) ................... 5-73 3.3.4 17-Gradation Test Print (PGTYPE=04) ................... 5-74 3.3.5 Halftone Test Print (PGTYPE=05) ................... 5-75 3.3.
CONTENTS 4.1.32 4.1.33 4.1.34 4.1.35 4.1.36 4.1.37 4.1.38 4.1.39 4.1.40 4.1.41 4.1.42 4.1.43 4.1.44 4.1.45 4.1.46 4.1.47 E350 ................................. 5-142 5.1.5 Fixing/Delivery Assembly 5-170 E351 ................................. 5-142 5.1.6 Delivery Vertical Path, Duplexing E517 ................................. 5-143 Reversing Assembly, and Pre-duE620 ................................. 5-144 plex Feeding Assembly ....... 5-171 E700 ................................. 5-144 5.1.
CONTENTS 7.3 Making Connections .............. 5-212 7.4 Downloading .......................... 5-214 7.5 After the Work ....................... 5-215 APPENDIX 1 General Timing Chart ........................ A-1 2 General Circuit Diagram .................... A-3 3 Paper Deck J1/K1 General Timing Chart ........................ A-7 2 Buffer Pass Unit General Circuit Diagram .................... A-8 5 Special Tools ...................................... A-9 6 Solvents and Oils .............................
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 Specifications 1.1 Type Body Console Copyboard Fixed Light source Halogen lamp Lens Fixed lens array Image reading Photocell (BGR 3-line CCD); scanning by mirror with CCD fixed in place Photosensitive medium OPC drum (60-mm dia.); 4 pc.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.2 Functions Type of original Maximum size of original Reproduction ratio auto ratio selection, zoom Wait time (20ºC) First copy time (A4/LTR) Continuous copying Copying speed Copy size Cassette Multifeeder Paper deck Type of copy paper Cassette Multifeeder Sheets, 3-D object (2 kg max.) A3 (297 x 420 mm)/11 x 17 (279 x 432 mm) Direct (±0.5%); default enlargement/reduction (±1.0%; see Table 1-201); zoom, 25% to 400% (±1.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Density adjustment Color mode Color adjustment Original mode map, second copy Original detection Cassette selection Page separation Auto double-sided Manual (9 steps), color AE, BE ACS, black, full color Color balance, registration, hue, chroma, density area Text/print photo, text/film photo, text, print photo, film photo, Size, position Auto paper selection, auto cassette selection Page separation, free division, enlargement separation, reduced page composition (requires RDF
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.3 Others 1.3.1 Copier Operating environment Temperature: 15 to 27.5ºC Humidity: 25% to 75% Atm pressure: 810.6 hPa to 1013.3 hPa (0.8 to 1.0 atm) Power supply (rated voltage ±10%) Power supply 200V 208/240V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V Serial No. LQZxxxxx NSXxxxxx (UL) PRXxxxxx (ITA) SCZxxxxx (FRN) TDLxxxxx (GER) UHBxxxxx (AMS) PRMxxxxx (general) QEBxxxxx (UK) PDQxxxxx (CA) Power consumption 3 KW or less (during copying, A4, full-color continuous) 0.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Dimensions 100 mm min. 1565mm • Without Options 2106mm 100 mm min. 1565mm • With Paper Deck-J1, Feeder, Stapler Sorter, Buffer Path Unit, and Projector 3052mm F01-103-01 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.4 Default Ratios Site Japan 6R5E North America 5R4E Europe 3R3E Others 5R5E Reduction Ratio Enlargement Ratio — 0.250 B4 to A3 B5R to A4R B5 to A4 1.153 A3 to A5 0.500 A4R to B4 A5 to B5 1.223 A3 to B5 0.611 A4R to B4 B5R to B4 1.414 A3 to A4R B4 to B5R 0.707 A5 to A3 2.000 B4 to A4R 0.815 — 4.000 A3 to B4 A4R to B5R 0.865 — — 0.250 LGL to 11x17 1.214 — 0.500 — 1.294 11x17 to LTRR 0.647 LTRR to 11x17 2.000 11x17 to LGL 0.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.5 Copying Speed Source Side Medium Cassette 1st Plain paper Copying speed A4/LTR A3/11x17 Transparency Paper deck 1st Plain paper 4R/B4 50 25 30 9 — 8 50 25 30 (B4) Duplex unit 2nd Plain paper 20 10 10 Multifeeder 1st Plain paper 35 18 22 2nd Thick paper 16 11 12 Extra-thick paper 13 8 9 9 7 8 Transparency T01-105-01 The above specifications are subject to change for product improvement. COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2 Safety 2.1 Safety of Laser Light Laser light can be harmful to the human body. The machine’s laser unit is sealed in a protective housing and external covers to prevent escape of laser light to the outside of the machine, protecting the individuals around the machine from the harmful effects of laser light as long as the machine is used in normal ways.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2.2 CDRH Ordinance The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drug Administration put into effect an ordinance to govern laser products on August 2, 1976. The ordinance applied to laser products produced on August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products is banned in the US without certification under the ordinance. The following is the label indicating compliance under the CDRH ordinance, and it must be attached to all laser products sold in the US.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2.3 Handling Parts Associated with the Laser Unit Do not introduce a screwdriver or the like (i.e., with a high degree of reflectance) into the laser path when servicing the areas around the laser unit. Also, remove watches, rings, and the like to prevent laser light from reflecting to your eyes. Extra attention is called for when servicing the inside of covers to which the following label is attached. The machine is equipped with a shutter to cut off the path of laser light.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION F01-203-02 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3 Names of Parts 3.1 External View [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [12] [11] [6] [10] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Copyboard Control panel Editor (accessory) Hopper lid (toner supply mouth) Multifeeder assembly Paper deck (accessory) [9] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [8] [7] Control key/power switch Right front cover Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Left front cover Delivery tray F01-301-01 1-12 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [11] [7] [10] [9] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Fixing assembly knob Counter Front cover switch Hopper assembly Transfer unit Duplex unit [8] [12] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] Duplex front feedingassembly Waste toner box (for transfer belt) Fixing/delivery/reversal unit Fixing oil bottle Service book case Waste toner box (for process unit) F01-301-02 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3.2 Cross Section [9] [11] [13] [15] [17] [19] [21] [23] [25] [27] [29] [31] [1] [3] [5] [7] [2] [4] [6] [8] [10] [12] [14] [16] [18] [20] [22] [24] [26] [28] [30] [32] [33] [34] [36] [35] [37] [65] [38] [40] [41] [39] [42] [44] [46] [64] [49] [43] [45] [47] [48] [50] [52] [54] [51] [53] [55] [56] [59] [60] [57] [61] [58] [62] [63] F01-302-01 1-14 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] External delivery roller Internal delivery roller No. 2 mirror base Fixing upper belt Scanning lamp Fixing upper roller Oil applying roller Fixing lower roller Pre-fixing feeding assembly Separation charging assembly Image position correction CCD unit Lens K BD sensor CCD K image position correction mirror K No.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 4 Control Panel 4.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 4.1.1 Instructions to the User Instruct the user on the following: 1. When making a double-sided copy in manual mode, correct the curling along the leading edge of the paper by bending in opposite direction. 2.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION • In the Multifeeder/Paper deck Vertical: Place it so that the triangle in a corner is to the left front. (3) Horizontal: Place it so that the triangle in a corner is to the left front. (4) (3) (4) F01-401-03 5. Cassette Sheets In a high-humidity environment, paper tends to become moist, adversely affecting copying. As needed, place a cassette sheet on the bottom of the cassette tray before depositing paper. 1-18 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 4.2 List of User Modes Item Description Key touch sound Error alert sound Auto cassette change Single original sort Trace width Outline position Shadow length Ratio in steps Density in steps Color sheet change Settings initialization Standard mode setting (ON*/OFF) (ON*/OFF) (ON*/OFF) (ON*/OFF) (1 to 4 mm; 1-mm increments; 4 mm*) (inside/outside*) (0.25 to 0.5 mm; 0.25 mm increments/1.5 mm*) (1% increments*/0.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 5 Routine Maintenance by the User 5.1 Cleaning the Outside Advise the user to clean the surface of the copyboard glass, copyboard cover (editor), and touch panel once a week. 5.2 Checking the Leakage Breaker Check the leakage breaker once or twice a month, and record the results. Making a Check 1) Press the test button of the breaker. Test button F01-502-01 1-20 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2) Check to make sure that the open/close lever has shifted to the OFF terminal side and the power has been cut. F01-502-02 3) Turn off the main power switch. 4) Shift the open/close lever to the ON side. F01-502-03 5) Turn on the main power switch. COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 1 Exposure System 1.1 Outline of the Original Exposure System The machine’s exposure system is designed on the reader scanner of the CLC1100 Series machines. F02-101-01 shows a block diagram of the machine’s exposure system, and F02-101-02 shows its external view. Exposure system Scanning lamp No. 2 mirror CCD driver (forward) CCD No. 1 mirror Lens No. 3 mirror F02-101-01 Scanner motor (M29) Scanner thermal switch 1 (TP4) No. 1 mirror base No.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 1.2 Comparison of Exposure Systems Unit/Part Differences from CLC1000 Series machines Purpose Reference Scanner HP sensor Home position search To improve the accuracy of detection 1.3 “Basic Sequence of Operations (exposure system)” Scanner motor Drive voltage used for To support higher speed 1.4 “Scanner Motor” reverse movement (from 24 to 40 V) Scanning lamp intensity Number of scanner ther- To improve safety control mal switches (from 1 to 2) 1.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 1.3 Basic Sequence of Operations (exposure system) 1.3.1 Scanner Home Position Sensor and Operations • • • • The scanner home position sensor (PS37) turns on as follows: When the power is turned on. When the Start key is pressed. When scanning of an original ends. When CCD is adjusted (in service mode). Original leading edge 14mm PS37 2mm Home position Start position Original 1. HP search at power-on 2. Shading correction 3. Original detection 4.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 1.3.2 Sequence of Operations • Without Pre-Scanning (if original detection OFF, ACS off, APS OFF) Start key ON CNTR [C] [A] Scanning lamp Scanner motor (M29) Original scanner HP sensor (PS37) • With Pre-Scanning (single scan over original; standard mode) Start key ON CNTR [A] [B] [C] Scanning lamp Scanner motor (M29) Scanner HP sensor (PS37) reverse (scanner in reverse) high-speed rotation standard rotation [A]:shading corection.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 1.4 Scanner Motor 1.4.1 Outline The following figure shows the circuit used to control the scanner motor, and the circuit has the following functions: 1. Controlling the direction of rotation of the scanner motor 2. Controlling the speed of rotation of the scanner motor The scanner motor changes its direction of rotation to move the scanner forward or in reverse, and the speed of its rotation when the scanner is moved forward changes to suit the selected reproduction ratio.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 1.5 Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp 1.5.1 Outline The machine’s scanning lamp is a halogen lamp. The following figure shows the circuit used to control the intensity of the scanning lamp, and the circuit has the following functions: 1. Turning on and off the scanning lamp 2. Detecting the activation of the scanning lamp 3.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 2. Detecting the Activation of the Scanning Lamp As long as the scanning lamp (LA1) remains on, the lamp ON detection circuit also remains on to generate the ON detection signal to the timer circuit. If the scanning lamp remains on for about 60 sec for some reason (e.g., fault), the timer circuit turns on the error latching circuit to force the LAON signal to go ‘0’, thereby turning off the lamp.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 1.6 Disassembly/Assembly The machine has the mechanical features and operations as described herein, and may be disassembled or assembled as shown; be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling or assembling the machine: Disconnect the power plug for safety before the work. 1. 2. Unless otherwise noted, reverse the steps used to disassemble the machine for assembly. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 1.6.1 Removing the Scanner Motor [2] [2] 1) Remove the right glass retainer and the vertical size plate; then, detach the copyboard glass. 2) Remove the reader rear cover. 3) Remove the left rear upper cover. 4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the four screws; then, detach the scanner motor [3] together with the mounting support as if to pull it out to the bottom.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 1.6.2 Removing the Lens Base Cover/CCD Cover/CCD Unit 1) Disconnect the power plug. 2) Detach the copyboard glass. 3) Remove the four screws [1], and detach the lens base cover [2]. [1] [1] [2] F02-106-04 4) Remove the two screws [3], and remove the two CCD unit retaining screws [4]. 5) Remove the two screws [5], and detach the grounding plate [6]. [5] [3] [3] [4] [6] F02-106-05 6) Lift the CCD unit [7], and disconnect the two connectors [8]; then, remove the screw [9].
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 1.6.3 Removing the Scanner Cover 1) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the auxiliary cover [2]. 2) Remove the four screws [3], and detach the laser scanner cover [4]. Be sure to keep the mirror base fully to the left. In addition, take care not to damage the power cord [5] of the scanning lamp. Pay attention to the bend found at the front. [3] [3] [4] [1] [3] [5] [2] [1] [3] F02-106-07 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 2 Image Processing System 2.1 Outline of the Image Processing System • The major changes include the elimination of the memory compression/de-compression function and the addition of the direct mapping function. • The rest of the image processing system are the same as those of the CLC1000 Series machines. The image processing system consists of the following: • CCD line sensor used to convert light reflected by the original into analog video signals.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 2.2 Differences in the Image Processing System Unit/part Differences for CLC1000 Series machines Purpose Reference IP memory board Elimination of memory compression/de-compression function • To reduce the cost of memory element • To enable high image quality 2.4 “IP Memory Board” Image processor PCB Addition of direct mapping function To improve reproduction 2.5 “Direct Mapping” of images T02-202-01 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
2-14 R.G.B. Color conversion R.G.B. Y.M.C.K. R.G.B. R.G.B. Y.M.C.K. Color editing Y.M.C.K. Bus selection Bitmap data Ratio processing Bitmap data Bitmap memory Filter processing Area data generation Area data Control panel/editor A Color space correction Interface board R.G.B. Controller 2.3 Functional Blocks R.G.B. F02-203-01 YMC conversion Direct mapping Background removal Color space correction Character detection Image integration Bus selector R.G.B. Input blanking R.G.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 2.4 IP Memory Board The machine uses four photosensitive drums, requiring temporary retention of image signals in image memory. The image data (YMC signals and text signals) from the scanner is sent to the IP memory board and stored in image memory. It is then read in response to the read signal prepared with reference to the ITOP signal. The UCR processing block generates the K signal and sends it to the image processor PCB. Y.M.C.K.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3 Laser System 3.1 Outline of the Laser System • The major difference is the change of an image position correction sequence for standby and the formation of images using 800 lines. • The rest of the construction is the same as that of the CLC1000 Series machines. 3.2 Differences in the Laser System Unit Difference from CLC1000 Series machines Purpose Reference Entire system Addition of image formation using 800 lines To increase the reproduction of images 3.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3.3 Image Formation Using 800 Lines The machine uses 800 lines as the outline of a character, thereby making each character sharper. REF. A CLC1000 Series machine uses 400 lines to form a character and 266 lines in YK halftone areas or 200 lines in CM halftone areas. 800 lines 400 lines F02-303-01 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3.4 Image Position Correction Sequence in Standby 3.4.1 Outline The machine executes image position correction while in standby state, and this function is independent of presses on the Start key. REF. In the case of a CLC1000 Series machine, image position correction is executed in response to a press on the Start key by the user, forcing the user to wait for nearly 1 min once the correction starts. 3.4.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3.5 Disassembly/Assembly The machine has the mechanical features and operations as described herein, and may be disassembled or assembled as shown; be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling or assembling the machine: Disconnect the power plug for safety before the work. 1. 2. Unless otherwise noted, reverse the steps used to disassemble the machine for assembly. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3.5.1 Preparing for Laser Unit-Related Work 1) Remove the right glass retainer, right rear upper cover, and digital covers (1 through 4). 2) Remove the fixing screw [2] of the digital unit [1]; then, lift it in the direction of the arrow (from front to rear), and secure it as indicated. [1] [2] [2] F02-305-01 [1] F02-305-02 2-20 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3) Remove the two screws [3], and detach the analog processor PCB [4]; then, secure it on the hook hole [5] with a screw [6]. [4] [3] F02-305-03 [5] [6] F02-305-04 4) Remove the three screws [7], and detach the duct plate [8]. [7] [7] [8] F02-305-05 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5) Remove the duct [9]; then, disconnect the connector from the video controller PCB [10], and remove the 9 screws [11]. Detach the video controller PCB together with its support plate. [9] [11] [11] [10] [11] F02-305-06 2-22 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3.5.2 Removing the Laser Unit Motor 1) Perform laser unit-related preparatory work. (See the appropriate instructions.) 2) Disconnect the connector (J03) [1] from the laser scanner motor driver PCB, and remove the three screws [2] of the laser scanner motor assembly. [1] [2] F02-305-07 Do not remove the screw used to hold the lid in place.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS When removing the laser scanner motor, be sure to work while paying attention to the lenses found to the left and the right of the motor assembly and the dust-proofing glass of the motor assembly. When mounting the laser scanner motor, do not force the harness while connecting the connector to the laser scanner motor driver PCB to avoid disconnecting the connector.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3.5.3 Removing the C Image Position Correction Mirror Unit 1) Perform laser unit-related preparatory work. 2) Remove the two cable mounting screws [1] and the cable clamp [2]. Remove the two cover mounting screws [3], and disconnect the connector [4] from the video controller PCB; then, detach the image position correction mirror cover.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3.5.4 Mounting the C Image Position Correction Mirror Unit 1) Force the C image position correction mirror assembly [1] accurately against the butting plate [2], and secure it in place. [1] [2] [3] [2] 02-305-12 Be sure to attach the weight [3] whenever replacing the mirror unit. 2-26 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3.5.5 Removing the C Slant Correction Motor 1) Remove the C image position correction mirror unit. (CLC1000 Chap. 4>VI.>B; however, keep in mind that the CLC1000 has different Cyan and Yellow positions) 2) Remove the wire saddle [1] and two screws [2]; then, detach the slant correction motor unit [3]. [3] [1] [2] F02-305-13 3) Remove the E-ring [4] and two screws [5]; then, detach the slant correction Motor [6]. [5] [6] [4] F02-305-14 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3.5.6 Removing the C Ratio Correction Motor 1) Remove the C image position correction mirror unit. 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the spring [2]. 3) Remove the two screws [3], and detach the ratio correction motor unit [4]. [2] [1] [3] [4] [3] F02-305-15 4) Remove the E-ring [5] and two screws [76]; then, detach the ratio correction motor [7]. [6] [7] [5] [6] F02-305-16 2-28 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS Points to Note When Mounting the Slant Correction Motor 1) While moving the mirror assembly [1] in the direction of the arrow, force the motor unit [3] in the direction of tightening the screw [2]. 2) Attach the wire saddle [4], then attach the screw [5]. [3] [1] [2] [4] [5] F02-305-17 3.5.7 Shifting the scanner Unit 1) Remove the right glass retainer, right rear upper cover, and digital covers (1 through 4). 2) Secure the digital unit in place. (See F02-305-02.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Secure the analog processor PCB on the hook hole [4] with a screw. [4] [5] F02-305-19 5) Remove the three screws [6], and detach the duct panel [7]. [6] [6] [7] F02-305-20 6) Disconnect the four connectors [8]. [8] F02-305-21 2-30 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7) Remove the two stepped screws [9]. [9] F02-305-22 8) Remove the left cover. 9) Remove the two screws [10] from the control panel fixing plate. [10] F02-305-23 10) Remove the screw [11], and detach the hopper unit left cover [12]. [12] [11] F02-305-24 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 11) Remove the screw [13] from the control panel support plate, and shift the control panel [14] by 7 to 8 mm to the front. [14] [13] F02-305-25 12) Remove the five screws [15], and shift the scanner unit [16] to the left. [16] [15] [15] F02-305-26 2-32 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS Blank page COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4.1 Outline of the Image Formation System • The major differences include the sequence of image formation (to CMYK) and an increase in the process speed. • The rest of the image formation process are the same as those of the CLC1000 Series machines. • The following items found in the CLC1000 Series machines are not used in the machine: → Detection of home position for the transfer belt → Control of attraction position → Grounding roller 2-34 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS Blank page 2-36 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4.3 Auto Gradation Correction (PASCAL) 4.3.1 Outline The machine uses the following two types of auto gradation correction: 1. Full Correction • Corrects the solid areas using test print 1. • Corrects the halftone areas (400 lines, 80 lines) using test print 2. • Corrects the halftone areas (200/266 lines) using test print 3. 2. Quick Correction • Corrects the gradation areas (200/266 lines, 400 lines) using test print 4 4.3.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Generate Test Print 2. Output of 400 lines for each color Output of 800 lines for each color F02-403-02 2-38 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5) Check to make sure that the test print output is free of image faults, and have it read by the machine. (If it has an image fault, perform the Basic Image Adjustment Procedure.) • Using the image data collected by reading the test print output, the machine finds the characteristics of the laser output and the image density (F02-403-03), and computes a correction value for 400-line/800-line image data to obtain the ideal gradation characteristics.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6) Generate Test Print 3. K 800-line C 800-line output output Y 800-line M 800-line output output K 266-line C 200-line output output Y 266-line M 200-line output output F02-403-04 2-40 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7) Check to make sure that the generated test print is free of image faults, and have it read by the machine. (If it has an image fault, perform the Basic Image Adjustment Procedure.) • Using the image data collected by reading the test print output, the machine finds the characteristics of the laser output and the image density, and computes a correction value for 200-/266-line image data so that the ideal solid density may be obtained. COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4.3.3 Operations (quick correction) The machine executes quick correction under the following condition: • For the high-density areas, if the density is appropriate but the gradation of the halftone areas is different from that of the original. The following sequence of operations is used: 1) In user mode, make the following selections: auto gradation correction>quick correction. 2) Generate a test print.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3) Check to make sure that the generated test print is free of image faults, and have it read by the machine. (If it has an image fault, perform the Basic Image Adjustment Procedure.) • Using the image data collected by reading the test print output, the machine finds the characteristics of the laser output and the image density (F02-403-07), and computes a correction value for 400-line and 200-/266-line image data so that the ideal solid density may be obtained.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4.4 Transfer Unit 4.4.1 Outline • • • • The machine’s transfer unit is constructed as shown in F02-404-01. The transfer unit has the following functions: Attracts copy paper from the registration roller to the transfer belt by means of the transfer blade (C). Transfers toner images from the C, M, Y, and K photosensitive drums. Separates the copy paper separated from the transfer belt to the pre-fixing feeding assembly. Cleans the surface of the transfer belt.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4.4.2 Cleaning Mechanism for the Transfer Belt a. Outline The transfer belt unit is equipped with a cleaning mechanism designed to remove dirt from the transfer belt (toner and fixing oil).
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS b. Transfer Cleaning Blade The transfer cleaning belt is used to remove toner deposited on the transfer belt as the result of image position correction or the like. The toner collected by the cleaning blade is moved to the waste toner bottle by the feedscrew that is operated the transfer belt waste toner motor (M31). The cleaning blade remains in contact with the transfer belt at all times.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS c.Oil Removing Roller The oil removing roller is used to remove fixing oil from the transfer belt. REF. When a double-sided copy is made, the side with toner after fixing is placed on the transfer belt, causing the fixing oil to move to the transfer belt. If the transfer belt rotates as it is, the oil will move to the photosensitive drum, causing fogging or other adverse effects on the next copy image.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS d. Polishing Roller The polishing roller polishes the surface of the transfer belt to limit the friction against the cleaning blade, thereby preventing the otherwise possible bending of the blade. REF. As more and more images are formed, toner and paper lint tend to build up, increasing the friction against the cleaning blade. The polishing operation takes place at the end of image position correction for an equivalent of 2 rotations of the transfer belt.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4.5 Disassembly/Assembly The machine has the mechanical features and operations as described herein, and may be disassembled or assembled as shown; be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling or assembling the machine: Disconnect the power plug for safety before the work. 1. 2. Unless otherwise noted, reverse the steps used to disassemble the machine for assembly. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4.5.1 Charging System a. Removing the Primary Charging Assembly Motor [2] 1) Lift the hopper assembly. (See CLC 1000 Chap. VII. “Hopper System.”) 2) Pull out the primary charging assembly. 3) Remove the E-ring [1] and the bushing [2]. 4) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the screw [4]; then, detach the primary charging assembly motor support [1] plate [5]. [5] [3] [4] F02-405-01 5) Remove the two screws [6], and detach the primary charging assembly motor [7].
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3) Remove the screw [3], and disconnect the connector [4]; then, detach the separation charging assembly [5]. [4] [3] [5] 02-405-04 b-2. Routing the Gut Wire 1) Route the gut wire as shown. F02-405-05 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS b-3. Removing the Separation Charging Assembly Motor 1) Remove the separation charging assembly. (See b-1. “Removing the Separation Charging Assembly.”) 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the motor mounting base [2]. [1] [2] F02-405-06 3) Remove the separation charging assembly motor [3]. (The motor is snapped in place.) [3] F02-405-07 c-1. Removing the Pre-Fixing Charging Assembly 1) Open the front cover. [2] 2) Remove the hopper unit left cover.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS c-2. Removing the Gut Wire 1) Route the gut wire as shown. F02-405-09 c-3. Removing the Pre-Fixing Charging Assembly Motor 1) Remove the pre-fixing charging assembly. (See c-1. “Removing the Pre-Fixing Charging Assembly.”) 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the motor mounting base [2]. [2] [1] F02-405-10 3) Remove the motor [3]. (The motor is snapped in place.) [3] F02-405-11 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4.5.2 Process Unit System a. Sliding out the process unit case 1) Shift down the releasing lever [1] of the transfer unit to release the transfer belt from the photosensitive drum. [1] F02-405-12 2) Lift the hopper unit. 3) Remove the four primary charging assemblies [2]. [2] F02-405-13 Place the primary charging assembly so that the grid faces upward. 2-54 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Remove the four positioning knobs [3] of the photosensitive drum. (Turn the smaller knob in the middle counterclockwise.) [3] F02-405-14 5) Remove the two screws [5] of the process unit case [4]. [4] [5] [5] F02-405-15 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6) Install the two process unit grips [6]. [6] F02-405-16 7) Slide out the process unit case [7] fully to the front. [7] F02-405-17 2-56 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS b. Removing the Process Unit 1) Slide out the process unit case. 2) Remove the screw [1] equipped with a spring. [1] F02-405-18 3) Pull out the positioning pin [2]. [2] F02-405-19 4) Push the middle of the cleaning blade [3] with your finger, and move the pressure releasing pin [5] in the direction of the arrow while the area is away from the drum [4] to free the cleaning blade. [4] [5] [3] F02-405-20 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5) Holding the grips [8] with both your hands, lift the process unit [9] about 5 cm, and shift it to the rear to detach. [8] [9] F02-405-15 Points to Note When Removing the Process Unit ■ Lay paper where the unit will be placed. (Toner may fall out.) ■ Do not move the unit over other unit of different color toners. 2-58 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS c. Mounting the Process Unit 1) Remove all developing assemblies, and attach the drum protection sheet [1] to each photosensitive drum. [1] Photosensitive drum for M/Y/Bk [1] Photosensitive drum for C Plastic sheet Check to make sure that the edge of the white paper is found as shown by the naked eye. F02-405-22 ■ Do not touch the area where contact will be made with the drum. ■ Before putting it to use, be sure to dry wipe it with lint-free paper. COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 2) Set the process unit [2] to the process unit case. [2] F02-405-23 3) Shift the pressure releasing point of the cleaning blade back to its initial position. 4) Orient the two protrusions inside the flange shaft of the photosensitive drum to match the groove [4] of the drum shaft on the machine side. Match the positions for the protrusions and the groove.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5) Insert the positioning pin into the developing assembly. 6) Set the process unit case to the copier. 7) Secure the positioning pin in place with the screw equipped with a spring. When setting the process unit case, be sure that the protrusion on the inside of the flange of the photosensitive drum is in the groove in the drum shaft. Further, take care not to force the process unit to avoid damage to the drum surface.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS d. Separating the Developing Assembly and the Drum Cleaner Unit 1) Remove the screw [1] from the front/ rear side plate of the process unit; then, shift the drum cleaner unit [2] to the rear, and turn it counterclockwise to detach. [2] [1] F02-405-26 [1] F02-405-27 e. Removing the Cleaning Blade Seal 1) Remove the process unit from the copier. (See the instructions on how to remove the process unit.) 2) Remove the screw [1], and remove the cleaning blade seal [2].
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS REF. Points to Note When Removing the Cleaning Blade Seal ■ Turn the reciprocating gear [3], and shift the blade base so that a gap will show where the seal is attached at the edge of the cleaner to facilitate the work. [3] 0~0.5mm Points to Note When Mounting the Cleaning Blade Seal ■ Make sure that the gap between the blade and the cleaning blade seal is about 0.5 mm as shown. Try pushing the cleaning blade seal to be sure that it will not get trapped by the blade. 0~0.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS f. Removing Seal from the Cleaner Edge 1) Remove the process unit from the copier. (See the instructions on how to remove the process unit.) 2) Remove the cleaning blade. 3) Remove the spacer [1] and the scraping sheet [2]. [1] [2] F02-405-31 4) Remove the screw [3] from the front and the rear, and remove the washer [4]; then, detach the cleaner edge seal [5]. [3] [4] [3] [4] [5] [5] F02-405-32 2-64 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS g. Removing the Cleaner Assembly Scoop-Up Sheet 1) Remove the process unit from the copier. (See the instructions on how to remove the process unit.) 2) Separate the developing assembly and the drum cleaner unit. 3) Remove the three screws [1], and detach the cleaner assembly scoop-up sheets [2] together with its support plate. [1] [2] [1] [1] F02-405-33 h.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4.5.3 Transfer Belt Unit a. Removing the Transfer Blade 1) Open the front cover, and slide out the transfer unit assembly to the front. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the transfer unit cover [2]. [1] [1] [2] F02-405-35 3) While pulling the lever [3] found on the bottom of the transfer unit assembly, set the transfer assembly releasing lever [4]. [4] [3] F02-405-36 4) Turn the cam [5] by hand so that the belt unit [6] will be in UP position.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5) Give the knob [7] a half clockwise turn, and pull out the transfer blade assembly [8]. [8] [7] F02-405-38 6) Give the knob a half counterclockwise turn to release the lock; then, remove the two screws [9], and detach the transfer blade [10]. [9] [10] [9] F02-405-39 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS b. Cleaning the Transfer Blade 1) After performing step 5) for removing the transfer blade, keep the transfer blade assembly [1] upright as shown; then, clean the blade [2] and the plastic sheet [3] with lint-free paper or a blower brush. (Be sure to keep the strokes in one direction only.) [3] [1] [2] F02-405-40 c.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Disconnect the connector [4], and detach the separation guide [5]. [5] [4] F02-405-43 Points to Note When Mounting the Separation Guide When mounting the separation guide, be sure that the plastic sheet [6] is inside as shown, not hitting the transfer belt and bending. [6] F02-405-44 5) While pulling the lever [7] to the front, set the transfer releasing lever [8]. [8] [7] F02-405-45 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6) Turn the cam [9] by hand so that the belt unit [10] is in UP position. [9] [10] F02-405-46 7) Disconnect the two connectors [11], and loosen the screw [12]; then, shift the lock plate [13] to the left. [12] [11] [13] F02-405-47 8) Push the cleaning blade [14] with your finger to release the pressure; then, lift the inlet guide [15] while supporting it at its center.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9) As if to lift the transfer belt assembly [16] slightly, hook the pin of the transfer unit fixing [1] on the hole [18] of the transfer belt assembly [17]; at this time, be sure that the hole of the transfer belt assembly is securely engaged with the groove of the pin. [1] [16] [17] [18] F02-405-49 d-1.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3) Remove the screw [2] for the waste toner box relay. [2] F02-405-51 4) Remove the two fixing screws [4] of the transfer cleaner unit. [4] [3] F02-405-52 When removing the screw at the rear, be sure NOT to touch the screw [5] indicated in the drawing. (The screw is used to position the drive roller.) [5] F02-405-53 2-72 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5) Free the harness of the transfer cleaner motor [6] from the clamp [7], and disconnect the connector [8]. [7] [8] [6] F02-405-54 6) Move the transfer cleaner unit [3] to the left to detach. [3] F02-405-55 7) Open the transfer belt assembly. (See the instructions on how to open the transfer belt.) 8) Loosen the mounting screw [9] to free the sensor unit fixing plate [10]. [9] [10] F02-405-56 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9) Push down the sensor unit [11], and force the sensor unit fixing plate [10] in the direction of the arrow; then, tighten the screw [9] to secure the sensor unit [11] and the sensor unit fixing plate [10]. [9] [11] [10] F02-405-57 10) Remove the screw [12], and detach the transfer inlet paper guide [13]. [13] [12] F02-405-58 11) Remove the three screws [14], and detach the transfer frame front support plate [15].
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 12) Push in the transfer unit assembly [16] to the rear until it comes lightly in contact with the motor [18]. [17] [16] F02-405-60 13) To protect the transfer belt [18], place a sheet of A3 paper [19] as shown. [18] [19] F02-405-61 14) Remove the two screws [20], and pull off the No. 2 back cleaning member [21] to the front. [20] [21] [20] F02-405-62 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 15) Remove the screw [22], and pull out the fixing [23] at the front. [23] [22] F02-405-63 16) Remove the two screws [24]; then, while pulling the rear lever [25] in the direction of the arrow [A], bend the slave roller assembly [26] in the direction of the arrow [B]. [B] [26] [25] [24] [A] F02-405-64 17) Pull the transfer belt to the front to detach.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS d-2. Removing the Transfer Belt (method 2) • After removing the transfer unit assembly from the copier 1) Remove the transfer belt assembly. 2) Place the transfer belt assembly as shown, and remove the two releasing lever fixing screws [1] at the rear. [1] [1] F02-405-66 3) Thereafter, place the transfer belt assembly as shown on the floor, remove the screw [2], and detach the transfer belt assembly inlet paper guide [3]. [2] [3] F02-405-67 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Remove the screw [4], and free the fixing (front) [5]. [4] [5] F02-405-68 5) Release the rear releasing lever [6]. [6] F02-405-69 6) Bend the slave roller assembly [7] in the direction shown, and detach the belt [8]. [7] [8] F02-405-70 2-78 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS e. Removing the Transfer Belt Motor 1) Slide out the transfer unit assembly to the front, and open the transfer belt assembly. (See the instructions on how to open the transfer belt.) 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the three screws [2] and the adjusting screw [3]; then, detach the transfer belt motor [4]. [1] [3] [2] [2] [4] F02-405-71 f. Mounting the Transfer Belt Motor 1) Mount the motor by reversing the steps used to remove it.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS g. Removing the Internal Static Eliminating Roller 1) Slide out the transfer belt assembly. 2) Remove the transfer unit cover. (Refer to F02-405-34) 3) Set the transfer assembly releasing lever. (Refer to F02-405-35) 4) Remove two screws [1], then detach the rear transfer assembly cover. [1] [2] F02-405-73 5) Disconnect the connector [3]. [3] F02-405-74 2-80 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6) Remove the screw [4], and pull out the internal static eliminating roller [5] as if to lift it. [5] [4] F02-405-75 Points to Note When Mounting • When removing the internal static eliminating roller, be user to force to n the front while connecting the connector [3]. • When mounting the transfer rear cover, be sure to take care not to trap the harness. [3] F02-405-76 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4.5.4 Transfer Belt Base a. Removing the Transfer Cleaning Blade 1) Remove the transfer cleaner unit. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the scoop-up sheet [2]. [1] [2] F02-405-77 3) Remove the two screws [3], and detach the blade base [4]. [3] [4] F02-405-78 Points to Note When Mounting the Transfer Cleaning Blade Assembly 1. But the blade support plate against the bearing of the transfer belt shaft from the rear. 2.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS b. Removing the Transfer Belt Waste Toner Motor 1) Remove the transfer cleaner unit. 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the transfer belt waste toner motor [2]. [2] [1] F02-405-79 c. Replacing the Stray Toner Blocking Plastic Sheet 1) Remove the transfer cleaner unit. 2) Remove the three screws [1], and detach the stray toner blocking plastic sheet [2].
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS e. Removing the Transfer Cleaning Web 1) Disconnect the connector [1]; then, while pushing down the pressure arm [2], lift the web assembly [3] to detach. [2] [3] [1] F02-405-82 2) After removing the resinous e-ring [4] and the cleaner blade support shaft [5], detach the web fixing bushing [6]. [5] [4] [6] F02-405-83 3) Lift the cleaning belt detection lever [7] on the front side of the cleaning belt as shown in the figure.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) When installing the transfer cleaning web [8], follow the guidance in the label [9] indicated in the figure F02-40586. The figure F02-405-87 shows the installation result. [9] F02-405-86 [8] F02-405-87 f. Removing the Polishing Roller 1) Remove the screw [1], fixing [2], and bushing [3]; then, detach the polishing roller [4]. [4] [3] [1] [2] F02-405-88 g.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5 Pickup/Feed System 5.1 Outline of the Pickup/Feed System • The major difference is the higher copying speed (from 30 to 50 cpm; A4, Direct). • The pickup assembly is based on that of the CLC1100. The feed system, on the other hand, is identical to that of the CLC1000. The machine uses the center reference method, in which paper is moved in the middle of the pickup/ feed path.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.2 Differences in the Pickup/Feed System Unit/part Difference from CLC1000 Series machines Purpose Remarks Reference Pickup/vertical path assembly Increase in the feed speed (400 mm/sec) in relation to the process speed of 200 mm/sec To enable high-speed operation Separate pickup units for cassettes 1 and 2 5.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS Blank page 2-88 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS Paper thickness detecting roller Registration roller Multifeeder feeding roller Photosensitive Photosensitive drum Y drum C De-curling roller Photosensitive Multifeeder Photosensitive drum K pickup roller Delivery Fixing assembly drum M roller Pre-fixing feeding PS2 PS4,PS5 assembly PS3 PS34 PS35 PS14 PS15 Multifeeder tray PS1 PS38 Delivery vertical path roller Duplex reversal Transfer belt outlet roller Pre-duplexing Pre-duplexing PS32 feed roller 2 feed roller 3 Feeder roll
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.3 Cassette Pickup Assembly 5.3.1 Outline The machine’s pickup assembly is constructed as shown in T02-503-01 and F02-503-01. The paper inside the cassette is moved up by the work of a lifter, and remains in contact with the pickup roller. When the pickup roller clutch turns on, the pickup roller starts to rotate to pick up paper. Then, the pickup roller releasing solenoid turns on so that the pickup roller moves away from the surface of the stack of paper.
M39 M37 M38 M C COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.3.2 Cassette Lifter Operation T02-503-02 shows an outline of the movement of the cassette lifter. When the cassette is set in the copier, the pickup roller moves down, and the lifter detecting lever leaves the lifter sensor. This condition turns on the cassette lifter motor to move up the lifter. The cassette lifter motor stops when the cassette lifter sensor reaches a position at which it can detect the top surface of the stack of paper placed on the lifter.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.3.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.4 Multifeeder Pickup Assembly 5.4.1 Operations The multifeeder pickup assembly is constructed as shown in F02-504-01. The multifeeder is a mechanism in which sheets are picked up from a stack placed on the tray for continuous feeding. As many as 250 sheets (81.4 g/m2 paper) may be placed on the tray. The paper on the tray is detected by the multifeeder paper width sensor (PS4, PS5).
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.4.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.4.3 Releasing the Registration Roller The registration roller is released to make up for the minute discrepancy in speed between the registration roller and the transfer belt occurring when thick paper is moved, thereby preventing displacement of images during transfer. When the multifeeder is the source of paper, the registration roller releasing solenoid (SL16) turns on as the registration roller starts to rotate and the paper is attracted to the transfer belt.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.5 Duplex Unit 5.5.1 Outline When fixing ends, the paper is moved to the delivery vertical path assembly by the delivery paper deflecting plate. Then, the paper is turned over in the duplex reversing assembly, and is sent to the duplex feeding assembly inside the duplex unit. In the duplex feeding assembly, one of three paper paths is configured by the work of the paper deflecting plate, and the re-pickup roller performs pickup for the second side.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.5.2 Feeding in Duplex Mode When fixing on the first side ends, the paper is moved to the duplex reversing assembly through the delivery vertical path assembly configured by the delivery paper deflecting plate driven by the delivery paper detecting plate solenoid (SL14).
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS Re-pickup Re-pickup motor roller clutch Reversal drive clutch CL16 M20 Duplex feed motor Waste toner feed motor M19 CL10 Re-pickup shutter solenoid SL8 Paper feed roller solenoid SL13 PS32 PS33 PS8 M37 PS9 PS30 PS21 PS29 PS31 M28 Duplex reversal motor SL11L SL11M SL11S Duplex paper deflecting plate solenoid F02-505-04 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.5.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.5.4 Pickup from the Duplex Unit 1. Outline When paper is butted against the re-pickup shutter, the re-pickup shutter solenoid (SL8) turns on to move up the re-pickup shutter. Then, when the feeder roller moves the paper as far as the re-pickup roller, the repickup roller clutch (CL10) turns on. As a result, the drive of the re-pickup motor (M37) is transmitted to the re-pickup roller to start pickup.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 2) Sequence of Operations Duplex Unit (2nd side), A4/LTR, 2 Copies, Continuous, 4-Color, Direct Start key ON (second page) CNTR COPY Photopositive drum motor (M21) Duplex paper sensor 2 (PS31) Feeding roller solenoid (SL13) Re-pickup shutter solenoid (SL8) Re-pickup motor (M37) Re-pickup clutch (CL10) Pickup vertical path 1 sensor (PS21) Registration paper sensor (PS1) Transparency sensor (OHPS) Registration motor (M35) F02-505-07 2-102 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.6 Detecting Jams 5.6.1 Outline The machine’s jam detection sensors are constructed more or less in the same way as the CLC1000’s sensors; for the types and the location of each sensor, see the CLC1000 Service Manual. 5.6.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.7 Disassembly/Assembly The machine has the mechanical features and operations as described herein, and may be disassembled or assembled as shown; be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling or assembling the machine: Disconnect the power plug for safety before the work. 1. 2. Unless otherwise noted, reverse the steps used to disassemble the machine for assembly. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.7.1 Removing the Multifeeder Assembly 1) Remove the multifeeder tray assembly. 2) Disconnect the three connectors [1], and remove the three screws [2]; then, shift the multifeeder assembly [3] in the direction of the arrow to detach. [1] [2] [1] [3] [2] [2] F02-507-01 When Mounting the Multifeeder To mount it, match its hook against the hole in the stay, and slide it to the right. COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.7.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Assembly 1) Remove the right front cover and the right rear cover. 2) Slide out the cassette 1/2 and the duplex unit to the front. 3) Remove the three screws [3] at the front and the three screws [4] at the rear; then, detach the right door unit [5]. [5] [3] F02-507-02 [5] [4] F02-507-03 2-106 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Remove the screw [6], and detach the connector cover [7]. [7] [6] F02-507-04 5) Disconnect the two connectors [8], and remove the two screws [9]; then, detach the cassette pickup unit [10]. [8] [10] [9] [8] [9] F02-507-05 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.7.3 Removing the Re-Pickup Assembly 1) Remove the right cover. (See F02-50702.) 2) Remove the screw [1] at the rear, and detach the connector cover [2]. [2] [1] F02-507-06 3) Disconnect the two connectors [3], and remove the two screws [4] at the front and the two screws [5] at the rear; then, detach the re-pickup assembly [6]. [4] [6] [3] [5] [3] [4] [5] F02-507-07 2-108 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.7.4 Removing the Re-Pickup Motor 1) Remove the right cover. (See F02-50702.) 2) Remove the re-pickup assembly. (See 5.7.3 “Removing the Re-Pickup Unit.”) 3) Remove the two screws [1] at the front and the screw [2] at the rear; then, detach the stay [3]. [3] [1] F02-507-08 [3] [2] F02-507-09 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Remove the two screws [4], and disconnect the connector [5]; then, detach the re-pickup motor [7]. [4] [6] [4] [5] F02-507-10 5.7.5 Removing the Re-Pickup Unit Clutch 1) Remove the right cover. (See F02-50702.) 2) Remove the re-pickup assembly. (See 5.7.3 “Removing the Re-Pickup Assembly.”) 3) Remove the grip ring [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the re-pickup clutch [3]. [2] [3] [1] F02-507-11 2-110 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.7.6 Removing the Re-Pickup Shutter Solenoid 1) Remove the right cover. (See F02-50702.) 2) Remove the re-pickup assembly. (See 5.7.3 “Removing the Re-Pickup Assembly.”) 3) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the pickup shutter solenoid [3]. [3] [2] [1] F02-507-12 When Mounting the Re-Pickup Shutter Solenoid You will have to make adjustments. Be sure to mark the position with a scribe (A in the figure before) removing it.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.7.7 Removing the Duplex Unit Feed roller 1) Remove the duplex unit. 2) Remove the two resin clamps [1], and detach the feed roller [3] from the feed roller shaft [2]. [3] [1] [2] [1] F02-507-14 5.7.8 Removing the Pre-Fixing Feeding Assembly 1) Remove the left cover. 2) Slide out the fixing unit and the transfer unit. 3) Remove the two screws [1]. [1] F02-507-15 2-112 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Disconnect the two connectors [2], and shift the pre-fixing feeding assembly [3] to the front, and pull it out from the delivery side. [3] [2] F02-507-16 5.7.9 Removing the Pre-Duplex Feeding Unit 1) Remove the left cover. 2) Open the front cover, and slide out the fixing unit and the transfer unit. 3) Slide out the pre-fixing feeding assembly. (See the instructions on how to remove the pre-fixing feeding assembly.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5) Remove the two screws [4]; then, detach the grip [5] and the reinforcing plate [6] of the pre-duplexing feeding assembly. [4] [5] [6] F02-507-18 6) Lower the lifter plate [7] of the duplex feeding assembly, and hook it on the cut-off [8]. [7] [8] F02-507-19 7) Slide out the duplex unit, and remove the screw [9]. [9] F02-507-20 2-114 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 8) Slide out the transfer unit, and remove the screw [10]. [10] F02-507-21 9) Move the pre-duplex feeding assembly to the front once; then, slide it back toward the delivery side to detach. When Removing When removing it, be sure to keep the duplex unit slid out. When Mounting When mounting it, be sure to hook the stepped screw [11] show in the figure on the groove [12] in the frail. [12] [11] F02-507-22 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5.7.10 Delivery/Reversing Assembly a. Removing the Delivery/Reversing Assembly 1) Open the front left cover, and detach the left cover. 2) Slide out the fixing unit. 3) Loosen the two screws [1]. [1] F02-507-23 4) Remove the four screws [2], and open the outside delivery unit and the inside delivery unit; then, disconnect the two connectors [3], and pull out the delivery/reversing assembly [4] to the left of the machine.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS b. Removing the Separation Claw 1) Open the front left cover, and slide out the fixing unit; then, open the outside delivery unit and the inside delivery unit. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the sensor cover [2]. [2] [1] F02-507-25 3) Remove the screw [3], and detach the delivery sensor assembly [4]. [3] [4] F02-507-26 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Remove the screw [5], and detach the positioning pin [6] of the separation claw unit; then, detach the separation claw unit [7]. [7] [6] [5] F02-507-27 5) Remove the spring [8], and detach the separation claw [9]. [9] [8] F02-507-28 2-118 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS Blank page COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6 Fixing System 6.1 Outline of the Fixing System • The major differences are the addition of oil heater, higher fixing speed, and elimination of the gloss function. • The rest are more or less identical with CLC1000 Series machines. 2-120 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6.2 Outline of the Fixing System Unit/part Difference from CLC1000 Series machines Purpose Reference Fixing drive assembly Control of fixing speed (from 6 to 4 steps) To review speed in support of high-speed operation To eliminate the gloss selection function 6.3 “Outline of Fixing/Delivery Assembly” 6.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS Blank page 2-122 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6.3 Outline of the Fixing/Delivery Assembly The following are driven by the fixing motor (M9): • Fixing upper roller • Lower fixing roller • Delivery roller • Oil applying roller • Fixing upper web lock To ensure good fixing invariably in duplex, transparency, or normal mode, the machine changes its fixing speed among four levels. The upper roller and the lower roller are each provided with a fixing cleaning web.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6.4 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature The fixing upper roller and the fixing lower roller are each heated by a fixing heater (H1: 800 W; H2: 600 W). The surface temperature of the upper roller is monitored by the upper main thermistor (TH1), while that of the lower roller is monitored by the lower main thermistor (TH3).
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS Relay (RL: NO) Upper fixing heater drive signal (UHON) AC driver PCB Thermal Upper switch fixing (TP1) heater (H1) J2241-14 Lower fixing heater drive signal (LHON) J2241-13 Oil heater drive signal (H9ON) Thermal Lower fixing switch (TP2) heater (H2) J2241-3 Fixing web motor drive signal (M3ON) Fixing lever Thermal switch switch Fixing oil (SW5: NO) (TP3) heater (H9) Main switch (SW2: NC) DC controller PCB J2241-9 CPU Triac fault detection signal (TERR*) +24V+24V M30 T
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6.5 Controlling the Fixing Oil Temperature To ensure that the upper fixing roller is provided with a specific level of oil at all items, the fixing oil in the upper oil pan is controlled to about 140°C by the oil heater (H9). The temperature of the fixing oil is monitored by the fixing oil thermistor (TH5), while that of the fixing oil heater is monitored by the fixing oil heater thermistor (TH6).
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6.6 Protective Mechanisms The machine is equipped with the following nine types of protective mechanisms to prevent malfunction of the fixing heater and the oil heater. 6.6.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6.6.3 Detecting an Open Circuit in the Thermistor If the open-circuit detection circuit on the DC controller PCB detects a difference of 60°C or more in the readings of the main thermistor and the sub thermistor, the DC controller PCB will issue the following error codes: then, it will cause the power OFF signal (PWOFF*) to go ‘0’, thereby turning off the power switch (SW2).
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6.6.7 Detecting Low Temperature of Oil (software) The CPU on the DC controller PCB monitors the voltage of the oil thermistor (TH5) and the oil heater thermistor (TH6), and the DC control PCB will issue the following error codes in the presence of a fault and then cause the power OFF signal (PWOFF*) to go ‘0’, thereby turning off the power switch (SW2): Thermistor Condition Error code Oil thermistor (TH5) It does not reach 50ºC after the end E000-0062 of WAIT.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6.8 Timing Chart (fixing/delivery assembly) 6.8.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6.8.2 Changing the Fixing Speed Start key ON Paper length Separation sensor (PS15) Inside delivery sensor (PS35) Pre-fixing feed motor (M11) Fixing motor (M9) Paper length 202mm/s 45mm/s *1 202mm/s 204mm/s *1: For feed speed, see “Controlling the Fixing Speed.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6.9 Driving the Fixing Cleaning Web a.Upper Fixing Web The upper fixing web used to clean the fixing roller is taken up 0.56 mm each time the upper fixing web take-up solenoid (SL3) turns on and off. The fixing web take-up solenoid turns on once for every 8 sheets of paper (small-size, smaller than A3). The end of the web is provided with a cut-off to enable detection of its length.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6.10 Disassembly/Assembly The machine has the mechanical features and operations as described herein, and may be disassembled or assembled as shown; be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling or assembling the machine: Disconnect the power plug for safety before the work. 1. 2. Unless otherwise noted, reverse the steps used to disassemble the machine for assembly. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6.10.1 Fixing Assembly With a few exceptions, the machine's fixing-related components may be serviced without removing the fixing assembly from the machine. a. Removing the Fixing Assembly Be sure to keep the fixing assembly inside the machine when removing such components as the fixing roller. The machine's fixing assembly is separate from the lower oil pan; be sure to collect the fixing oil from the upper oil pan into an oil bottle as follows before removing the fixing assembly.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6) Remove the two screws [7], and open the upper fixing roller unit [8]. [7] [8] [7] F02-610-02 7) Remove the two screws [9] each at the front and the rear; then, shift the oil applying unit [10] in the direction of the arrow. [9] [9] [10] [9] F02-610-03 2-136 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 8) Remove the screw [11] at the rear inside the upper oil pan, and wait until all fixing oil has been collected in the oil tank. [11] F02-610-04 9) Close the upper fixing roller unit. 10) Remove the two screws [12], and hold the grip [13] to detach the fixing assembly [14]. At this time, be sure to fit the screw [7] removed in step 6). [13] [14] [12] [13] [12] F02-610-05 Take care when lifting the fixing assembly.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS b. Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor (Upper) and Sub Thermistor (Upper) 1) Open the upper fixing roller unit. (See the instructions on how to open the upper fixing roller unit on the CLC1000 service manual chapter 4.) 2) Remove the two fixing main thermistor fixings [1]. 3) Free the thermistor cord from the cord [1] [2] retainer [2]; then, detach the fixing main [1] thermistor (upper) [3]. Note: The sub thermistor (upper) [4] may be removed in the same way.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3) Remove the two screws [3], and detach the fixing main thermistor (lower) mounting base [4]. [4] [3] F02-610-08 4) Remove the screw [5], and detach the fixing main thermistor (lower) [6]. [5] [6] [7] Note: The sub thermistor (lower) [7] may be removed in the same way. F02-610-09 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS d. Removing the Fixing Lower Roller Thermal Switch 1) Remove the fixing assembly. (See the instructions on how to remove the fixing assembly.) 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the fixing inlet guide mounting base [2]. [2] [1] [1] F02-610-10 3) Remove the screw [3], and detach the fixing lower roller thermal switch unit [4]. [4] [3] F02-610-11 2-140 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6.10.2 Upper Fixing Cleaner Assembly a. Removing the Upper Fixing Web 1) Open the front cover (left), and shift down the fixing assembly lever; then, slide out the fixing unit. 2) Remove the fixing assembly knob. 3) Remove the fixing front cover. 4) Open the outside delivery unit and the inside delivery unit. 5) Remove the screw [1], and detach the upper fixing cover [2]. [2] [1] F02-610-12 6) Remove the two screws [3], and detach the upper fixing web unit [4].
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7) Insert a metal ruler [5] along the stop plate [6] as shown, and release the web [7]. [6] [5] [7] F02-610-14 8) Remove the two screws [8] and the two bushings [9]; then, detach the fixing upper web [10]. [9] [10] [8] F02-610-15 b. Mounting the Upper Fixing Web 1. When mounting the web [1], be sure that the length detecting lever [2] is positioned as shown. [1] [2] F02-610-16 When mounting the upper fixing web, be sure to move the lever up and down to remove any slack.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6.10.3 Lower Fixing Cleaning Assembly a. Removing the Lower Fixing Web/Lower Fixing Blade 1) Open the front cover (left), and shift down the fixing lever; then, slide out the fixing unit. 2) Remove the fixing assembly knob. 3) Remove the front fixing cover. 4) Open the outside delivery unit and the inside delivery unit. 5) Remove the two screws [1]; then, slide [1] the lower fixing web unit [2] to the front, and pull it out.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7) Remove the four screws [7], and detach the lower fixing blade [7]. [6] [7] [6] F02-610-19 6.10.4 Fixing Oil Applying Unit a. Removing the Oil Applying Blade Unit 1) Open the upper fixing roller unit. (See Service Manual CLC1000, Chapter 4, the instructions on how to open the upper fixing roller unit.) 2) Shift down the oil applying blade unit [1] in the direction of the arrow; then, pull it up.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS b. Removing the Oil Applying Blade 1) Remove the oil applying blade unit. 2) Remove the four screws [1], and detach the oil applying blade [2]. [1] [2] F02-610-21 c. Removing the Toner Scraping Blade 1) Remove the oil applying blade. 2) Remove the two cover switch actuator [1] into the applying stay [2]; then, hook it on the blade arm [3] to release the blade. [3] [1] [2] [1] [3] F02-610-22 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3) Pick the toner scraping blade [4] with small pliers, and lift it to the point indicated in the figure to detach it in the upward direction. [4] F02-610-23 [5] When mounting the toner scraping blade [4], be sure to mount the blade plate to the inside of the protrusion [5] of the bushing indicated in the figure. [4] F02-610-24 2-146 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS d. Removing the Oil Applying Roller 1) Remove the oil applying blade unit and the toner scraping blade. 2) Remove the two E-rings [1] (1 each at front and rear). 3) Remove the gear [2] and the two bushings [3] (1 each at front and rear). 4) Remove the oil applying roller [4]. [1] [4] [3] [3] [2] [1] F02-610-25 e. How to remove the oil heater 1) Open the front cover (left). 2) Pull out the fixing unit. 3) Remove the fixing knob. 4) Remove the fixing assembly front cover.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9) Remove the oil-applying unit [3]. [2] [2] [3] F02-610-27 10) Unscrew the one screw [4] and remove the earth wire. [6] [5] [4] F02-610-28 When you unscrew the screw [4], be careful not to lose the toothed lock washer [6]. 2-148 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 11) Remove the E-ring [7] at the rear and the bushing [8], and remove the oil heater [9]. [8] [7] [9] F02-610-29 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7 Externals and Controls 7.1 Outline of the Externals and Controls The major difference is the addition of various fans, fuse PCB, and download function. The rest are the same as the externals and controls of the CLC1000 Series machines. 7.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7.3 Fans The machine is equipped with various fans for the discharge of ozone, suction of stray toner, and cooling of parts. 7.3.1 Arrangement of the Fans FM24 FM15 FM16 FM14 FM5 FM13 FM4 FM12 FM2 FM1 FM3 FM7 FM20 FM27 FM28 FM19 FM29 FM30 FM33 FM26 FM32 FM6 FM8 FM36 FM9 FM17 FM35 FM23 FM22 FM31 FM21 FM18 FM34 F02-703-01 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7.3.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7.3.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7.4 Power Supply The machine’s DC power is supplied to its loads directly or by way of a respective controller PCB from three power supply PCBs: DC power supply PCB 1 (upper), DC power supply PCB 1 (lower), and DC power supply PCB 2. The DC power supply PCB 1 supplies DC voltage in sync with the power switch, while the DC power supply PCB 2 supplies DC voltage independently of the power switch.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS a.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS b.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7.5 Download The machine will provide the following functions when it is connected to a PC by a biCentronics interface. PCB DC controller PCB Reader controller PCB Element Flash memory Backup memory RAM Flash memory Backup Ram Download Yes Yes Yes Yes Upload No Yes No Yes T02-705-01 The machine is switched between copying mode and download/upload mode by the switch found behind its inside cover.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7.6 Disassembly/Assembly The machine has the mechanical features and operations as described herein, and may be disassembled or assembled as shown; be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling or assembling the machine: Disconnect the power plug for safety before the work. 1. 2. Unless otherwise noted, reverse the steps used to disassemble the machine for assembly. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7.6.1 Fans and Filters a. Removing the Laser Scanner Motor Cooling Fan 1) Remove the rear cover (1). 2) Remove the filter [1]. [1] F02-706-01 3) Remove the two screws [2], and detach the filter mounting plate [3]. [2] [3] [2] F02-706-02 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Disconnect the connector [4], and remove the two screws [5]; then, detach the laser scanner motor cooling fan [6]. [5] [5] [6] [4] F02-706-03 b. Removing the Pick Up Cooling Fan 2 1) Remove the rear cover (2). 2) Remove the DC driver PCB. (See the instructions on how to remove the DC motor driver PCB.) 3) Remove the four screws [1], and detach the pick up cooling fan 2 [2]. [1] [1] [2] [1] F02-706-04 2-160 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS c. Removing the Pick Up Cooling Fan 1 1) Remove the rear cover (2). 2) Remove the multifeeder driver PCB. (See the instructions on how to remove the multifeeder driver PCB.) 3) Remove the four screws [1], and detach the pickup cooling fan 1 [2]. [1] [2] [1] [1] F02-706-05 d. Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 1) Remove the rear cover (1). 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the fan duct [2]. [1] [2] F02-706-06 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3) Remove the two screws [3], and disconnect the connector [4]; then, detach the fixing heat discharge fan [5]. [3] [5] [4] F02-706-07 e. Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan 1) Remove the left cover. 2) Remove the filter [1]. [1] F02-706-08 2-162 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3) Remove the two screws [2], and disconnect the connector [3]; then, detach the reversing assembly exhaust fan [4]. Memo The remaining three fans may be removed in the same way. f. Removing the Lower Delivery Cooling Fan 1) Remove the left cover. 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the two screws [2]: then, detach the delivery lower cooling fan [3]. [4] [2] [3] [2] F02-706-09 [1] [3] [2] F02-706-10 Memo The remaining two fans may be removed in the same way.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS g. Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan 1) Remove the left cover. 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the two screws [2]; then, detach the delivery cooling fan [3]. [2] [3] [2] [1] F02-706-11 h. Removing the Pre-Fixing Exhaust Fan 1) Open the front cover (left). 2) Remove the pre-fixing duct. (See the instructions on how to remove the prefixing filter.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Remove the two screws [5], and disconnect the connector [7]; then, detach the fan mounting plate [7]. [5] [7] [6] F02-706-13 5) Remove the filter [8]. [8] F02-706-14 6) Remove the two screws [9], and disconnect the connector [10]; then, detach the pre-fixing exhaust fan [11]. [11] [10] [9] F02-706-15 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS i. Removing the General Exhaust Fan 1) Open the front cover (left). 2) Slide out the transfer unit. 3) Remove the four screws; then, detach the general exhaust fan cover [2] together with the download cover [3]. [1] [2] [1] [3] [1] F02-706-16 4) Remove the four screws [4], and disconnect the connector [5]; then, detach the general exhaust fan assembly [7]. [4] [5] [6] [4] [4] [4] F02-706-17 2-166 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5) Remove the dust-proofing filter [7] and the ozone filter [8]. [8] [7] F02-706-18 6) Disconnect the connector [9], and remove the four screws [10]; then, detach the general exhaust fan [11]. [9] [11] [10] F02-706-19 Note: The three fans may be removed in the same way. COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS j. Removing the Pre-Fixing Filter 1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and pull put the pre-fixing duct [2]. [1] [2] F02-706-20 3) Remove the filter [3]. [3] F02-706-21 2-168 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7.6.2 Switches [1] [2] a. Removing the Rear Cover Switch 1) Remove the rear cover (2). 2) Remove the laser scanner motor cooling fan unit. 3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the rear cover switch [2]. [1] F02-706-22 7.6.3 PCBs a. Removing the Multifeeder PCB 1) Remove the rear cover (2). 2) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the 10 connectors [2]; then, detach the multifeeder PCB [3]. [2] [2] [1] [1] [3] F02-706-23 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS b. Removing the DC Driver PCB 1) Removing the rear cover (2). 2) Remove three screws [1], and disconnect the five connectors [2]; then, detach the DC driver PCB unit [3]. [1] [1] [2] [1] [3] [2] F02-706-24 3) Remove the four screws [4], and detach the DC drive PCB [5]. [4] [5] [4] [4] [4] F02-706-25 2-170 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS c. Removing the Fuse PCB 1) Remove the rear cover (3) 2) Disconnect the connector from the PCB, and remove the four PCB retaining clips [1]; then, detach the fuse PCB [2]. [1] [2] [1] F02-706-26 d. Removing the Download PCB 1) Open the front cover (left). 2) Slide out the transfer unit. 3) Remove the four screws [1], and detach the general exhaust fan cover [2] together with the download cover [3]. [1] [2] [1] [1] [3] F02-706-27 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Disconnect the two connectors [4], and remove the four screws [5]; then, detach the download PCB [6]. [4] [5] [4] [6] [5] F02-706-28 e. Removing the DC Controller PCB 1) Remove the rear cover (1). 2) Remove the nine screws [1], and detach the shield plate [2]. [1] [2] [1] [1] [1] F02-706-29 2-172 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3) Disconnect all connectors and remove the six screws from the DC connectors PCB; then, detach the DC controller PCB [4]. [3] [4] [3] F02-706-30 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS f. Removing the AC Driver PCB 1) Remove the rear cover (3). 2) Disconnect the connectors from the PCB, and remove the four PCB retaining clips [1]; then, detach the AC driver PCB [2]. [1] [1] [2] [1] F02-706-31 g. Removing the Lamp Regulator 1) Remove the rear cover (1). 2) Disconnect the three connectors [1], and remove the three screws [2]; then, detach the lamp regulator [3]. [2] [3] [1] [2] [1] F02-706-32 2-174 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS h. Removing the Developing Bias High-Voltage Assembly (HVT3) 1) Remove the rear cover (2)/(3). [1] [2] 2) Disconnect the four connectors [1], and remove the four screws [2]; then, detach the power supply cooling fan unit [3]. [2] [2] [2] [3] F02-706-33 3) Disconnect the conductor [4] and remove the three screws [5] from the pickup drive PCB; then, detach the pickup driver unit [6]. [5] [4] [4] [6] [4] [5] [4] [5] [4] F02-706-34 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Remove the two screws [7], and disconnect the ten connectors [8]; then, detach the developing bias high-voltage assembly (HVT3) [9]. [7] [8] [8] [8] [8] F02-706-35 [9] [7] F02-706-36 2-176 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS i. Removing the Analog Processor PCB 1) Remove the fixing screw [1], and secure the digital unit [2] in the position indicated. [2] [1] [1] F02-706-37 F02-706-38 2) Remove the four screws [3], and detach the reader controller cover [4]. [3] [3] [4] [3] F02-706-39 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3) Remove the two screws [5], and detach the two harness retainers [6]; then, disconnect the connector [7]. [5] [6] [7] [6] F02-706-40 4) Loosen the screw [8], and shift the connector retainer [9]; then, disconnect the four connectors [10], and remove the two screws [11] to detach the analog processor PCB [12]. [8] [12] [9] [11] [10] [10] [11] [10] [10] F02-706-41 2-178 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS j. Removing the Video Controller PCB 1) Secure the digital unit [1] as indicated in the figure. (See the instructions on the preparatory work for the laser unit.) [1] F02-706-42 2) Remove the three screws [2], and detach the air duct plate [3]. [2] [2] [3] F02-706-43 3) Disconnect all connectors and remove the four mounting screws [4] from the video controller PCB; then, detach the video controller PCB [5]. [5] [4] F02-706-44 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS k. Removing the Image Position Correction CCD Unit 1) Remove the hopper assembly left cover. 2) Remove the separation charging assembly. 3) Remove the pre-fixing charging assembly. 4) Slide out the transfer unit. 5) Free the harness [2] from the wire saddle [1]. 6) Remove the screw [3], and detach the cable support plate [4]. [1] [2] [4] [2] [3] F02-706-45 7) Disconnect the two connectors [5] at the front.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9) Remove the screw [8], and detach the cable fixing plate [9] at the rear. 10) Disconnect the two connectors [10] on the rear side. [10] [9] [8] F02-706-47 After mounting the image correction CCD unit, execute the following in service mode: FUCN>INSTALL (2nd sheet)>REG-PAPER (pattern read position auto adjustment); then, turn off and on the power to correct the image position. l. Removing the Transfer High-Voltage Transformer (HVT1) 1) Open the transfer unit.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3) Disconnect the five connectors from the transfer high-voltage transformer. [4] F02-706-49 4) Remove the two screws [5], and slide out the transfer high-voltage transformer [7] to the right. At this time, take care so that the transfer high-voltage transformer will not come into contact with the transfer belt. [5] [6] F02-706-50 5) Remove the screw [7] and the grounding wire [8]; then, disconnect the two connectors [9], and detach the transfer high-voltage transformer [6].
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS m. Removing the Flicker Controller PCB 1) Remove the rear cover (3). 2) Disconnect the three connectors [1], and remove the four PCB retaining clips [2]; then, detach the flicker controller PCB [3]. [2] [1] [1] [3] [2] F02-706-52 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7.6.4 Drive System a. Removing the Registration Drive Assembly 1) Remove the rear cover (2). 2) Remove the manual feed unit. 3) Remove the DC motor driver PCB. 4) Disconnect the three connectors [1]. [1] F02-706-53 5) Remove the two screws [2], and detach the harness retainer [3]. [2] [3] F02-706-54 2-184 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6) Remove the seven screws [4], and detach the registration drive assembly [5]. [4] [5] [4] [4] F02-706-55 b. Removing the Deck Pickup Motor 1) Remove the rear cover (2). 2) Remove the right rear cover. 3) Remove the DC motor driver PCB. 4) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the deck pickup motor [3]. [2] [1] [3] [1] F02-706-56 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS c. Removing the Registration Motor 1) Remove the rear cover (2). 2) Remove the right rear cover. 3) Remove the DC driver PCB. 4) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the registration motor [3]. [2] [3] [1] [1] F02-706-57 d. Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Motor 1) Remove the rear cover (2). 2) Remove the manual feed unit. 3) Remove the registration drive assembly. 4) Remove the four screws [1], and detach the multifeeder pickup motor [2].
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS e. Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 1) Remove the rear cover (2). 2) Remove the pickup driver PCB. 3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the cassette pickup motor [2]. [1] [2] [1] F02-706-59 Memo Both cassette 1/2 pickup motor may be removed in the same way. f. Removing the Transfer Lifter Clutch 1) Remove the rear over (2). 2) Remove the manual feed unit. 3) Remove the registration drive assembly.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5) Remove the tension spring [4] and two screws [5]; then, detach the shaft retaining plate [6]. [6] [4] [5] F02-706-61 6) Remove the three screws [7], and detach the gear retaining plate [8]; then, detach the gear [9]. [7] [8] [9] [7] F02-706-62 2-188 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7) Remove the E-ring [10]; then, remove the gear [11] and the parallel pin [12]. [10] [11] [12] F028-706-63 8) Remove the eight screws [13], and detach the registration drive support plate (upper) [14]. [14] [13] [13] F02-706-64 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9) Remove the clutch unit; then, remove the E-ring [15] and the set screw [16], and detach the clutch [17]. [16] [15] [17] F02-706-65 If you have removed the gears from around the transfer lifter clutch, take care not to confuse the gear mounting shafts (A, B). [A] [B] F02-706-66 2-190 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS g. Removing the Power Cord Base 1) Remove the rear cover (2). 2) Remove the pickup driver unit. 3) Remove the right rear cover. 4) Remove the screws [1], and detach the deck connector base [2]. [2] [1] [1] F02-706-67 5) Disconnect the six connectors [3]. [3] [3] [3] [3] [3] F02-706-68 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 6) Remove the three screws [4], and detach the power cord base [5]. [4] [5] [4] F02-706-69 h. Removing the Noise Filter 1) Remove the rear cover (2). 2) Remove the right rear cover. 3) Remove the deck connector base. (See the instructions on how to remove the power cord base.) 4) Disconnect the two connectors [1] from the power cord base, and remove the two screws; then, detach the noise filter. [3] [2] [2] [1] F02-706-70 2-192 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS i. Removing the Fixing Relay 1) Remove the power cord base. (See the instructions on how to remove the power cord base.) 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the cover (1) [2]. [2] [1] F02-706-71 3) Using the tip of a flat-blade screwdriver, free the hook to detach the fixing relay [3]. [3] F02-706-72 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS j. Removing the Leakage Breaker 1) Remove the power cord base. 2) Remove the three screws [1], and detach the cover (2) [2]. [2] [1] F02-706-73 3) Remove the screw [3], and detach the terminal base [4]. [3] [4] F02-706-74 2-194 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Remove the two screws, and detach the breaker base [7]. [5] [5] [6] F02-706-75 5) Remove the four terminals [7], and removed the two screws [8]; then, detach the leakage breaker [9]. [7] [9] [8] [7] F02-706-76 When mounting the leakage breaker, take care not to confuse its top/bottom orientation. Fit the hook on the breaker mounting base in the hole of the breaker. COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS k. Removing the Hater Triac (upper, lower) 1) Remove the rear cover (3). 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the heat triac (upper) [2]. [2] [1] [3] Note: The heater triac (lower) [3] may be removed in the same way. [1] F02-706-77 2-196 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 8 Paper Deck-J1/K1 8.1 Outline The Paper Deck-J1 differs from the Paper Deck-H1 for the following two points: • Elimination of the pickup cutch (CL8001) The rest are the same as those of the Paper Deck-H1. In addition to the above, the Paper Deck-K1 is different from the paper deck designed for the CLC1000 for the following: • Addition of a deck sensor (PS8003) The following paper sizes may be used for the Paper Deck-J1/K1: Supported paper sizes (81.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 8.3 Outline of Operations 8.3.1 Outline A paper deck enables accommodation of a large volume of paper (as many as 2,000 sheets in the Paper Deck-J1; 4,000 sheets in the Paper Deck-K1), and serves to feed sheets to its host copier in response to control signals from the DC controller PCB. Registration roller Photosensitive drum (M) Photosensitive drum (C) Transfer belt Holding tray Paper deck Cassette 1 Cassette 2 F02-803-01 2-198 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 8.3.2 Pickup Operations The paper placed inside the paper deck is held up by a lifter driven by the paper deck motor (M8001), and is kept at a specific position. The control signal from the DC controller PCB of the host copier turns on the deck motor (M36) and the deck pickup clutch (CL8002); then, the paper deck pickup roller releasing solenoid (SL8001) turns on so that the pickup roller leaves the surface of the paper.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 8.3.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 8.4 Disassembly/Assembly The machine has the mechanical features and operations as described herein, and may be disassembled or assembled as shown; be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling or assembling the machine: Disconnect the power plug for safety before the work. 1. 2. Unless otherwise noted, reverse the steps used to disassemble the machine for assembly. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 8.4.1 Removing the Pickup Roller 1) Open the paper deck cover. 2) Remove the four screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the paper deck heater [3]. [3] [2] [1] F02-804-01 3) Remove the resin clamp [4] at the front and the rear; then, detach the pickup roller [5]. [4] [5] [5] [4] F02-804-02 Take care not to drop the parallel pin from within the pickup roller shaft. 2-202 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 8.4.2 Removing the Pickup/Feed roller 1) Remove the paper deck heater. (See F02-804-01.) 2) Remove the pickup roller at the front. (See F02-804-02.) 3) Pull off the bush lock used to secure the side guide plate (left, right) so as to free the side guide plate. 4) Insert a screwdriver into the hole for the bush lock that has been removed in step 3); then, remove the mounting screw [1], and detach the roller stopper plate [2].
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5) Remove the resinic E-ring [3] and bearing [4]; then, pull out the pickup roller shaft [5] to the rear. [3] [4] [5] F02-804-05 [7] 6) Remove the mounting screw [6], and detach the separation roller assembly cover [7]. [6] F02-804-06 7) Remove the resinic E-ring [8]; then, while pushing down the separation roller assembly [9], detach the timing belt [10], and detach the pickup/feed roller assembly [11]. [8] [11] [9] [10] F02-804-07 2-204 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 8.4.3 Removing the Separation Roller [2] 1) Open the paper deck cover; then, remove the mounting screw [1], and detach the separation roller assembly cover [2]. [1] F02-804-08 2) Remove the mounting screw [3]; then, while pushing down the separation roller pressure member [4], detach the separation roller assembly [5] together with its support plate.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 8.4.4 Removing the deck sensor 1) Detach the paper deck from the main body of copier with the connecting rail attached to the main body. 2) Remove the screw [1] (1 location), then remove the deck sensor mounting plate [2]. [1] [2] F04-804-11 3) Remove the connector [3] (1 location), then remove the deck sensor [4]. [4] [3] F04-804-12 2-206 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9 Buffer Pass Unit-B1 9.1 Outline The buffer pass unit has the following two functions: • Removes curl from paper delivered by the copier • Turns over paper delivered by the copier REF. Paper tends to curl when the toner on it is heated in the fixing assembly and then cooled. Curl on paper adversely affects its movement and alignment inside the sorter.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.1.1 Outline of the Electrical Circuitry The electric mechanisms of the machine are controlled by its host copier (i.e., the machine is not equipped with controller PCB of its own). The signals from the copier are received by the buffer pass unit drive PCB to drive the motors, solenoids, and clutches.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.1.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS J1 Flapper solenoid Downward curl removing solenoid 1 Downward curl removing solenoid 2 Upward curl removing solenoid 1 Upward curl removing solenoid 2 Cover switch SL1 J204A-5 -4 SL3 J204A-7 -4 SL4 J204A-9 -8 SL5 J204A-11 -10 SL6 J204A-13 -12 SW1 FT5 FT6 FT2 FT3 FT4 FT1 J532 J302-1 -2 -3 -4 J205B-2 -1 +24V FLPSL1 +24V LDCRSL1 +24V LDCRSL2 +24V UDCRSL1 +24V UDCRSL2 +24V +24V +24V +24V SW Buffer pass unit driver PCB When ‘0’, the flapper solenoid turns on.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.2 Differences in the Buffer Path Unit Unit/Location Differences from CLC Buffer Pass-1 Remarks Vertical path guide (left/right) New addition To turn over the paper delivered by its host Reversal motor (M2) New addition To turn over the paper delivered by its host Cooling fan (FM1 through 4) New addition To cool the power supply, motor, and paper path.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.3 Feeding Operations 9.3.1 Outline The feeding operations consist of the following two: • Sending the paper coming from the copier to the sorter • Turning over the paper coming from the copier and then sending it to the sorter The feeder roller and the sponge roller are driven by the buffer pass motor (M1, M3). The sponge roller and the pressure roller pick paper and then flattens it out to remove curl. (The feeding speed is controlled by the buffer pass motor.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS Power switch ON 110˚C Start 1st sheet 2nd sheet 1181ms Copier main motor Buffer input motor (M1) Reversal motor (M2) Buffer output motor (M3) Flapper solenoid (SL1) Downward curl removing solenoid 1 (SL3) Downward curl removing solenoid 2 (SL4) Upward curl removing solenoid 1 (SL5) Upward curl removing solenoid 2 (SL6) 100ms Copier delivery sensor Inlet paper sensor (PS8) Outlet paper sensor (PS3) Reversal timing sensor (PS1) Reversal jam sensor (PS2) Cooling fan 1 (FM1) Cooli
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 2.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS Power switch ON 110˚C Start 1st sheet 2nd sheet 1181ms Copier main motor Buffer input motor (M1) Reversal motor (M2) Buffer output motor (M3) Flapper solenoid (SL1) Downward curl removing solenoid 1 (SL3) Downward curl removing solenoid 2 (SL4) Upward curl removing solenoid 1 (SL5) Upward curl removing solenoid 2 (SL6) Doublespeed CW CCW CW CCW Doublespeed Copier delivery sensor Inlet paper sensor (PS8) Outlet paper sensor (PS3) Reversal timing sensor (PS1) Reversal jam se
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.3.2 Controlling the Feeding Speed a. Outline The feeding speed is changed to suit the type of copy paper and whether the reversal unit is used or not; When the reversal unit is used, the feeding speed is doubled in consideration of the time between a press on the start key and delivery of the copy. The feeding speed is controlled as followes for each combination: Feeding Speed by Reversal Upper/Lower Moter Mode Speed (mm/sec) 204 408 138 276 90 180 67.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.3.3 Controlling the Buffer Pass Motor a. Outline The buffer pass motor (M1, M3) is a 4-phase stepping motor. It is turned on/off or its speed of rotation is changed by controlling the rest signal (RESETB) and the output timing of the pulse signals A, A* , B, and B* b.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS +24V BFROUTMTRA RESETB Buffer pass inlet motor M1 BFROUTMTRA* MODECH1 Copier CLK IC102 VLCNG BFROUTMTRB ENB BFROUTMTRB* Buffer pass driver PCB +24V BFRINMTRA RESETB Buffer pass output motor M3 BFRINMTRA* MODECH2 CLK Copier IC104 VLCNG BFRINMTRB ENB BFRINMTRB* F02-903-05 2-218 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.4 Removing Curling 9.4.1 Outline The curl removing roller and the pressure roller picks paper, and bend it in the direction opposite the direction in which the paper has curled. Bending may be in any of three degrees, and changed by rotating the pressure cam by the drive of the buffer pass motor.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS Buffer pass unit driver PCB Downward curl removing solenoid 2 (SL4) Curl removing roller Pressure roller Pressure roller base Buffer pass motor drive signal Phase sensor signal 1 (LCUPH1) Curl removing solenoid drive signal 1 (LDCRSL1*) Phase sensor signal 2 (LCUPH2) Curl removing solenid drive signal 2 (LDCRSL2*) Copier Paper Buffer pass motor M1 Spring clutch Downward curl removing solenoid 1 (SL3) Lower phase sensor 2 (PS7) M3 Lower phase sensor 1 (PS6) F02-904-02
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.4.2 Operations When the buffer pass motor (M1, M3) rotates, its drive is transmitted to the pressure cam through the spring clutch. When the pressure cam starts to rotate in response, the pressure plate moves up and down to change the degree of pressure of the curl removing roller.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS b. Spatial Relationship Between Curl removing Roller and the Pressure Roller in Relation to the Position of the Pressure cam Spatial relationPressure ship between curl Drive of pressure cam stop removing roller cam switching solenoid position and pressure roller (SL5, SL6) Spring 0˚ SL2 clutch Curl (home removing position) roller State of pressure cam home position sensor (PS4, PS5) PS2 PS1 0mm SL1 Pressure roller 90˚ SL6: ON SL2 Curl removing roller 0.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS The copier determines the position of the pressure roller based on the foregoing factors, and instructs the buffer pass unit accordingly; the signal indicating the position of the pressure roller is sent for each delivery made by the copier. The phase sensor 1 (PS4; for reverse, PS5) and the phase sensor 2 (PS6; for reverse, PS7) are used to detect the position for the pressure cam.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.5 Detecting Jams 9.5.1 Outline • • • • The machine is equipped with the following jam sensors: Inlet sensor (PS8) Delivery sensor (PSS3) Reversal jam sensor (PS2) Reversal timing sensor (PS1) PS8 PS3 PS1 PS2 F02-905-01 The presence/absence of paper or a jam is identified in relation to the presence/absence of paper over sensors in question at such times as stored in memory of the copier.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.5.2 Delay Jam After paper has reached the copier’s delivery sensor, the inlet sensor does not detect paper when period of time needed by paper to reach the machine’s inlet sensor (PS8) and a peried of time needed by paper to move distance of 60 mm have passed. In response, the buffer motor will be stopped, and the Jam indication will be made on the copier’s display.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.5.3 Stationary Jam After paper has reached the delivery sensor (PS3), the inlet sensor remains ON when a specific period of time and the period of time needed by paper to move a distance of 60 mm have passed. In response, the buffer motor will be stopped, and the Jam indication will be made on the copier's display. Jam indication Delivery sensor (PS3) Normal Error Jam check Buffer pass motor (M1; M3) F02-905-03 2-226 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.6 Power Supply 9.6.1 Outline The following diagram shows how power is distributed. The buffer pass unit is supplied with +5V and +24V power by the buffer pass power supply. +24 V is supplied by way of the cover switch (SW1) to the loads; it will be cut off when the front cover of the buffer pass unit is opened and, as a result, the cover switch turns off.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.7 Disassembly/Assembly The machine has the mechanical features and operations as described herein, and may be disassembled or assembled as shown; be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling or assembling the machine: Disconnect the power plug for safety before the work. 1. 2. Unless otherwise noted, reverse the steps used to disassemble the machine for assembly. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.7.1 External Covers [6] [7] [1] [5] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [4] [2] [3] Upper cover (2) Front cover (2) Right front cover (2) Left front cover (5) Rear cover (3) Left cover (4) Delivery cover (4) Memo The left cover and the delivery cover are used when the buffer pass unit is installed on its own. F02-907-01 The number in parentheses indicates the number of mounting screws used. To remove the front cover, remove the mounting screws from the cover hinge.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.7.2 Feeding System a. Removing the Upper Curl removing Roller 1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the retainer handle [2] together with the handle support base [3]. [3] [2] [1] F02-907-02 When mounting the retaining handle, be sure to fit the pin [4] on the slide shaft with the cutoff in the handle. [4] F02-907-03 2-230 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3) Remove the screw [5], and detach the lower arm base [6]. [6] [5] F02-907-04 4) Remove the two pressure adjusting springs [7], and detach the pressure plate [8]. [7] [8] F02-907-05 Do not touch the screw [10] used to secure the pressure spacer [9] to the pressure plate. It has been adjusted at the factory. [10] [9] F02-907-06 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5) Remove the E-ring [11], washer [12], and bearing [13] at the front and the rear; then, detach the curl removing roller [14]. [13] [12] [11] [14] [11] [12] [13] F02-907-07 b. Removing the Lower Curl removing Roller 1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the rear cover. 3) Remove the two screws [1] each at the [1] front and the rear; then, disconnect the connector [2], and detach the left stay [3]. [3] [1] [2] F02-907-08 2-232 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Pull the retaining handle to the from, and push up the retainer unit; then, remove the three screws [4], and detach the lower arm base [5] and then the pressure plate [6]. [5] [4] [4] [6] F02-907-09 6) Remove the E-ring [7], washer [8], and bearing [9] at the front and the rear; then, detach the curl removing roller. [9] [7] [10] [7] When removing the lower arm base, be sure to support the pressure plate with your hand.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS c. Removing the Feed Roller (vertical path; upper/lower) 1) Remove the rear cover. [4] 2) Remove the right front cover. 3) Disconnect the connector [1]; then, disconnect the connector [2] of the reversal motor. Thereafter, remove the six screws [3], and detach the vertical path [3] guide assembly [4]. [1] [3] [2] F02-907-12 4) Remove the four screws [5], and disconnect the connector [6]; then, detach the reinforcing plate [7].
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 5) Remove the three E-rings [8], pulley [9], parallel pin [10], two bearings [11], two washers [12], gear [13], and parallel pin [14] (for [13] and [14], bottom only); then, detach the feed roller (vertical path) [15]. [12] [11] [15] [11] [12] [8] [8] [15] [8] [8] [10] [9] [9] [10] [13] [14] [8] [8] [12] [11] [12] [11] F02-907-14 When detaching and attaching the vertical path guide assembly, be sure to take care not to damage the reversal plastic sheet.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS d. Removing the Feed roller (reversal inlet) 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Disconnect the two connectors [1] of the buffer pass motor. [1] [1] F02-907-15 3) Remove the E-ring [2] and the gear [3]. [2] [3] F02-907-16 2-236 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Open the front cover. 5) Pull the retaining handle [4] to the front, and push up the retaining unit. [4] F02-907-17 6) Remove the two screws [5] each at the front and the rear; then, detach the right lower guide [6]. [6] [5] [5] [5] F02-907-18 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7) Pull out the jam removing tab [7]; then, remove the E-ring [8], washer [9], and bearing [10] at the front. [7] [8] [9] [10] F02-907-19 8) Remove the two E-rings [11], washer [12], and bearing [13] at the rear then, detach the feed roller (reversal inlet) [14]. [11] [12] [13] [14] F02-907-20 2-238 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS e. Removing the Feed roller (reversal confluence) 1) Remove the rear cover. [2] 2) Remove heater reversal inlet roller. (See d. above.) 3) Remove the tension spring [1], and remove the four screws [2]; then, detach the buffer pass motor [3] together with its mounting base. [3] [2] [1] F02-907-21 4) Open the front cover. 5) Pull the retaining handle to the front, and push up the retaining unit. (See F02-907-17.) 6) Remove the E-ring [4], washer [5], and bearing [6] at the front.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7) Remove the two E-rings [7], gear [8], washer [9], and bearing [10]; at the rear; then, detach the feed roller (reversal confluence) [11]. [11] [8] [10] [7] [9] [7] F02-907-23 2-240 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS f. Removing the Feed roller (upper guide) 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the buffer pass motor together with its mounting base. (See F02-90721.) 3) Remove the E-ring [11] and the gear [2]. [2] [1] F02-907-24 4) Open the front cover. 5) Pull the retaining handle to the front, and push up the retaining unit. (See F02-907-17.) 6) Remove the two screws [3] at the rear. [3] F02-907-25 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 7) Remove the two screws [4], and detach the guide stopper [5]. [5] [4] F02-907-26 8) Remove the two screws [6] at the front, and detach the guide plate [7]. [7] [6] F02-907-27 2-242 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS [8] When mounting the guide plate [7], take care not to bend the plastic sheet [8] attached to the guide plate. [7] F02-907-28 9) Remove the E-ring [9], washer [10], ad bearing [11] at the front. [11] [10] [9] F02-907-29 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 10) Remove the two E-rings [12], gear [13], washer [14], and bearing [15] at the rear; then, detach the feed roller (upper guide) [16]. [16] [13] [12] [15] [14] [12] F02-907-30 9.7.3 PCBs Removing the Buffer Pass Driver PCB 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the four screws [1], and disconnect the 11 connectors [2]; then, detach the buffer pass driver PCB [3]. [1] [2] [3] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1] F02-907-31 2-244 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.7.4 Fans and Motors [3] a. Removing the Buffer Pass Motor (M1, M3) 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and remove the two screws [2]; then, detach the buffer pass motor [3]. [2] [2] [3] [1] F02-907-32 Memo The buffer pass input motor (M1) and the buffer pass output motor (M3) may be disassembled in the same way. b. Removing the Reversal Motor (M2) 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the right front cover.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS c. Removing the Cooling Fan 1/2 (FM1/FM2) 1) Remove the upper cover. 2) Remove the two screws, and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the cooling fan [3]. [1] [3] [2] Memo 2-246 The cooling fans 1 and 2 may be removed in the same way. [3] F02-907-34 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS d. Removing the Cooling Fan 3 (FM3) 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the cooling fan 3 [3] together with mounting base. [2] [3] [1] F02-907-35 3) Remove the four screws [4], and detach the cooling fan 3 [5]. [5] [4] [4] F02-907-36 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS e. Removing the Cooling Fan 4 (FM4) 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the fan mounting base [3]. [1] [2] [3] F02-907-37 3) Remove the two screws [4], and detach the cooling fan 4 [5]. [4] [5] F02-907-38 When mounting the fan, take care so that the direction of air will be downward. 2-248 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.7.5 Sensors a. Removing the Reversal Timing Sensor (PS1) 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the right front cover. 3) Remove the vertical path guide assembly. (See F02-907-12.) 4) Remove the four screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the reinforcing plate [3]. [2] [1] [3] [1] F02-907-39 5) Remove the screw [4], and detach the reversal timing sensor [5]. [4] [5] F02-907-40 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS b. Removing the Reversal Jam Sensor (PS2) 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the right front cover. 3) Remove the vertical path guide assembly. (See F02-907-12.) 4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the reversal jam sensors [3]. [1] [2] [3] F02-907-41 c. Removing the Delivery Sensor (PS3) 1) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the delivery sensor [3].
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS d. Removing the Upper Phase Sensor 1/2 (PS4/5) 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the sensor mounting base [3], and detach the upper phase sensor [4]. [3] [2] [1] [4] F02-907-43 e. Removing the Lower Phase Sensor 1/2 (PS6/7) 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the sensor mounting base [3], and detach the lower phase sensor [4].
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS f. Removing the Inlet Sensor (PS8) 1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the retaining handle. (See F02907-02.) 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the retaining guide bar [2]. [2] [1] F02-907-45 4) Remove the screw [3], and detach the inlet sensor base [4]; then, disconnect the connector [5], and detach the inlet sensor [6]. [A] [4] Do not remove the screw [A] indicated in the figure. [6] [3] [5] F02-907-46 2-252 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 9.7.6 Solenoids a. Removing the Flapper Solenoid (SL1) 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the buffer pass motor. (See F02-907-21.) 3) Remove the two screws [1], and pull out the arm [2] of the flapper solenoid together with the core shaft. If you happen to have removed the screw [A] indicated in the figure, make adjustments so that the flapper is positioned at F02907-47a when the solenoid has turned on. [A] [1] [2] F02-907-47 F02-907-47a COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 4) Remove the two screws [3] from the inside of the rear side plate, and detach the flapper solenoid [4]. [4] [3] F02-907-48 b. Removing the Downward Curl Removing Solenoid 1 (SL3) 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the solenoid mounting base [3]. [1] [3] [2] F02-907-49 2-254 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3) Remove the screw [4], and detach the solenoid [5]. [5] [4] F02-907-50 c. Removing the Downward Curl Removing Solenoid 2 (SL4) 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the solenoid mounting base [3]. [3] [2] [1] F02-907-51 3) Remove the two screws [4], and detach the solenoid [5]. [5] [4] F02-907-52 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS d. Removing the Upward Curl Removing Soiling 1 (SL5) 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the solenoid mounting base [3]. [1] [3] [2] F02-907-53 3) Remove the screw [4], and detach the solenoid [5]. [5] [4] F02-907-54 2-256 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS e. Removing the Upward Curl Removing Solenoid 2 (SL6) 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and discon[2] nect the connector [2]; then, detach the solenoid mounting base [3]. [3] [1] F02-907-55 3) Remove the two screws [4], and detach the solenoid [5]. [5] [4] F02-907-56 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS f. Removing the Cover Switch 1) Remove the two screws [1] behind the buffer pass front side plate, and detach the cover switch mounting base [2]. [1] [2] F02-907-57 2) Remove the six terminals [3], and detach the cover switchs [4]. (The cover switch is snapped in place.) [4] [3] [3] F02-907-58 2-258 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS g. Removing the Spring Clutch 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the phase sensor together with its support plate. (See F02-907-43, -44.) 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the sensor flag [2]; then, remove the stop screw [3], and detach the spring clutch [4]. [3] [4] [1] [2] F02-907-59 [4] [2] [1] [3] F02-907-60 Memo Both upper and lower spring clutches may be removed in the same way. COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS h. Removing the Power Supply Assembly 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and remove the five screws [2]; then, detach the power supply PCB [3]. [2] [1] [1] [2] [2] [3] F02-907-61 i. Removing the Noise Filter 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the four screws [1], and detach the power supply mounting plate [2]. [1] [2] [1] [1] F02-907-62 2-260 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 2 NEW FUNCTIONS 3) Remove the five terminals [3] and two screws [4]; then, detach the noise filter [5]. [4] [3] [3] [3] [3] [3] [4] [5] F02-907-63 j. Removing the Leakage Breaker 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the rounding wire [2]. Thereafter, remove six terminals [3] and the two screws [4]; then, detach the leakage breaker [5]. [1] [3] [2] [3] [5] [3] [3] [3] [3] [4] F02-907-64 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 1 Selecting the Site Select the site of installation with the following considerations in mind; if possible, pay a visit to the user’s before delivering the machine. 1.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3. Avoid areas near sources of fire and areas subject to dust or ammonium gas. Avoid direct rays of the sun; as necessary, provide curtains. 4. The room must be well ventilated. The level of ozone emitted by the machine should not harm the health of those around the machine. However, some may find the level unpleasant if the machine is used for a long time in a poorly ventilated room. Make sure the room is ventilated often. 10 cm min. 50 cm min. 50 cm min. 5.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION * Make the following spatial considerations for the machine: 100mm or more 1565mm without accessories 2106mm 100mm or more 1565mm with accessories 3052mm F03-100-03 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 2 Points to Note for Installation and Relocation 2.1 Base Plate and Installation/Relocation Work When moving the machine while supporting its base plate, be sure to place your hands as shown; otherwise, the external covers can suffer deformation. front back back right side front left side F03-201-01 3-4 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3 Installation When a metal object is brought in from a cold to a warm place, droplets of water can develop on its surface. This phenomenon is known as condensation, and copiers subjected to condensation tend to generate faulty images. If the copier has been brought in from a cold place, leave it alone at the site of installation for at least one hour before starting the work. 3.1 Unpacking Step Work 1 Cut the two bands used to hold the shipping box, and free the shipping box.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step 4 Work Remarks Lift the machine using a fork lift operating from the rear to move it off the skids and onto the floor. Adjuster When sliding in the prongs of the fork lift, be sure that the forks stop before they come into contact with the adjusters. Prongs Adjuster F03-301-03 5 3-6 Move the machine to the site of installation. Open the cardboard box, and take out the parts and accessories.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3.2 Removing the Fixings, Supplying Fixing Oil, and Changing the Voltage Rating (240V North American Model) Step Work 1 Take out the C, M, Y, and Bk starter bottles, and shake them well. Open the caps, peel off the seals, and keep them in a dust-free environment. Remove the strips of tape from the parts of the machine and the protection sheet used for the copyboard glass.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work 7 Release the lever of the transfer unit, and slide out the transfer unit; then, remove the fixing tape used to keep the jam tweezers in place and the fixing tape used to keep the transfer belt in place at the rear. Remarks Cushioning material Do not remove the tag found at the front of the pre-transfer cover. Remove all fixing tape from the pretransfer cover. Cushioning material F03-302-03 8 • Remove the screw, and detach the hopper assembly left cover.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work 9 After removing the hopper left cover and the separation charging assembly, mount the transfer unit fixing bracket to the front side plate of the machine. Remarks Transfer unit fixing bracket F03-302-06 10 Remove the two screws, and detach the pre-transfer cover. screw screw Transfer unit cover F03-302-07 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step 11 Work Remarks Disconnect the connector, and detach the separation guide. Separation guide connector F03-302-08 Plastic sheet Points to Note When Mouting the Separation Guide When mounting the separation guide,be sure that the plastic sheet is inside as shown,not hitting the transfer belt and bending. F03-302-09 12 While pulling the lever to the front, set the transfer releasing lever. Lever Lever F03-302-10 3-10 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step 13 Work Turn the cam by hand so that the belt unit is in UP position. Remarks Cam Belt unit F03-302-11 14 Disconnect the two connectors, and loosen the screw ; then, shift the locking plate to the left. 15 Push the cleaning blade to release the pressure, and lift the middle of the inlet guide. Screw connector Locking plate F03-302-12 When lifting the inlet guide, be sure to support at its middle to avoid deforming the guide.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work 16 As if to slightly lift the transfer belt assembly, hook the hole of the transfer belt assembly on the pin of the transfer unit fixing. At this time, be sure to engage the hole of the transfer belt assembly with the groove of the pin. Remarks Transfer belt assembly Transfer unit fixing Pin Hole F03-302-14 17 Remove the inside cushioning material (w/ tag) from the bottom of thetransfer belt. 18 Reverse steps 8) through 16) to assemble the transfer unit.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step 20 Work Slide out the fixing assembly, and remove the packing materials and taping. Remarks Packing materials Taping F03-302-17 21 Pull out the fixing pressure releasing spacer (2 pc.). Pressure releasing spacer F03-302-18 22 Set the fixing assembly. COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3.3 Supplying Toner Step Work 1 As if to invert the top and the bottom, shake the C toner container 20 times or more. Remarks Do not perform this step until immediately before setting the bottle to the hopper. 2 Open the lid of the C toner hopper, and fit the C toner bottle in the opening of the hopper; hold the base of the bottle, and turn the bottle clockwise until it stops (about 10°).
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work 5 Perform the same steps for the M, Y, and Bk toners as for the C toner. Remarks Do not dispose of the toner bottle in fire; it may tear open or explode. 6 7 Open the right cover, and remove the hopper assembly right cover (1 screw). Remove the two fixing screws from the hopper assembly. Screw Right cover Fixing screws F03-303-03 8 Holding both left and right grips, pull the hopper assembly to the front and then lift it.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step 10 Work Remarks Remove the four primary charging assemblies. Primary charging assembly After removal, place each primary charging assembly so that its grid side faces up. F03-303-06 11 Remove the four photosensitive drum positioning knobs. The knobs have a two-layer construction. To remove, turn the small knob at the center counterclockwise. 12 Remove the two screws from the process unit mount.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step 13 Work Remarks Install the two process unit grips that come with the machine. Grip F03-303-09 14 Slide out the process unit mount. 15 Loosen the mounting screw of the C drum, and detach the photosensitive drum cleaner pressure releasing members (rear). Slide the pressure releasing member in an arrow [A]. Perform the same for M, Y, and Bk.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work 16 Put the process unit back into the machine, and remove the grips. Install the two screws removed in step 12. Install the photosensitive drum positioning knob. Install the primary charging assembly. (Be sure to put each charging assembly back to its original location.) Slide out the transfer unit, and remove the drum protection sheet in the direction of the arrow. Store away the drum protection sheet.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work 25 26 Start service mode, and press FUNC . Press INSTALL twice to select screen 2. Remarks INSTALL DISP ADJUST COUNTER AUTO-REG 0 REG-APER 2/4 LSNS-KIL 0 FUNC OPTION TEST F03-303-13 27 28 Press LSNS-KIL to select ‘1’. Wait until warm-up ends. During the wait period, perform the Original tray following: Stepped screws (face • Set the cassette size to suit the needs of sticker is attached to the user.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work 30 Install the hopper retaining fixing that comes with the machine (right). Remarks Hopper retaining fixing F03-303-15 31 32 Install the hopper retaining fixing that comes with the machine. (left) Release the lock of the hopper assembly, and lower the hopper assembly as far down as the metal fixing. F03-303-16 3-20 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step 33 Work Install the two laser shutter opening tools to the two laser shutters. Remarks Laser shutters (2 pcs.) F03-303-17 Laser Shutter opening tool Groove Laser shutter F03-303-18 Laser shutter opening tool Laser shutter F03-303-19 34 35 Lift the hopper assembly as far up as it moves, and manually engage the lock found in the lower left of the hopper assembly. Work as instructed under 3.4 “Supplying Starter.” COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3.4 Supplying Starter Step 1 Work Remarks Return to the 1st screen (‘FUNC > INSTALL’ in service mode). Press SPLY-Y . INSTALL DISP COUNTER INIT-C The screw of the C developing assembly starts to rotate.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work 5 After supplying all developing assemblies with starters, check to make sure that 10 min or more has passed since the end of toner supply (to the hopper). Install the retaining fixing. Release the lock of the hopper assembly, and lower the hopper assembly as far down as the hopper assembly retaining fixing; then, remove the sheet from the toner supply mouth (for all colors). Pull it down at an angle to facilitate removal.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step 12 Work Remarks Press INIT-7 . The initial ATR data will be read. Wait until the operation ends automatically.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step 14 Work Press the Remarks key to bring up the 2nd screen of ‘INSTALL’. Press IMG-REG to select ‘1’. INSTALL DISP ADJUST FUNC COUNTER IMG-REG 0 REG-APER 0 RECV-Y 0 2/4 LSNS-KIL 1 RECV-M RECV-C 0 RECV-K 0 0 OPTION TEST F03-304-08 15 Press REG-APER to execute image position correction. Before executing ‘REGAPER’, check to make sure that the transfer unit is at locking position. 16 17 18 19 20 Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3.5 Checking Images and Operations Step Work 1 Press a key on the control panel (other than the Copy Start key) to make sure that operation is normal. Set the CA-1 Test Chart on the copyboard, and make a copy to check the image. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3-26 Remarks • Make sure there is no abnormal noise. • Check the copy image for each default ratio. • Make sure that the specified number of copies are made normally. • Try each cassette, paper deck, and multifeeder.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 4 Relocating the Machine Step Work 1 Tape the cover of the toner hopper in place. • Install the scanner metal fixing. Insert the metal fixing through the louver on the delivery side, and slide it to the rear to fix the scanner mirror mount in position. Tape the metal fixing in place. Remarks Scanner metal fixing F03-400-01 2 3 4 5 Open the copier’s front cover. Release the lever of the fixing unit, and slide out the fixing unit.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work 8 Remove the two screws, and remove the fixing assembly. Remarks Fixing assembly Be sure to fit the two screws removed in step 6 in advance of this step. Screw Screw F03-400-04 9 Remove the two screws, and remove the fixing assembly mount (front, rear); then, remove the oil receptacle. Fixing assembly (rear) Screw Oil receptacle Fixing assembly mount (front) At this time, take care not to drop the hose attached to the oil receptacle.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 5 Installing the Original Tray ■ Installing on the Right Step 1 2 Work Peel the four face stickers from the copier’s right side, and fit the two stepped screws. Fit the original tray over the stepped screws; then, fix the tray in position with two screws. Remarks Original tray Stepped screws Screws F03-500-01 ■ Installing on the Left Step 1 2 Work Peel the four face stickers from the copier’s right side, and fit the two stepped screws.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 6 Installing the Control Card V Be sure to disconnect the power plug before starting the work. Step Work 1 2 Open the copier’s front cover (left, right). Remove the screw, and remove the hopper assembly right cover. Remove the screw, and remove the hopper assembly left cover. Remove the two fixing screws from the hopper assembly.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work 7 Remove the control panel relay connector and the two control card connectors; free the harness for the control card from the wire saddles behind the control panel; then, turn over the control panel. Remarks Control card connector Wire saddles Control panel relay connector F03-600-04 8 Remove the 13 screws, and remove the control panel back cover.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work 12 Fix the control card to the control panel using four self-tapping screws. At this time, slide in and out a card, and fix the control card where the card slides in and out easily. Further, check that the printer connector is centered over the hole. Remarks Screws Control Card V Screw Screw F03-600-07 13 Fix the grounding wire of the control card to the control panel.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work 15 Peel the protective sheet from the control panel ratings plate of the control card. Attach the control panel ratings plate of the control card to the control panel. Fix the back cover to the control panel with 13 screws; then, connect the control relay connector to the control panel.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 7 Installing the DA Unit-A1 Be sure to observe the following when installing the DA unit to its host copier: 1. Check to make sure that the copier has properly been installed. Discon nect all power plugs. 2. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 3. Store the settings data of the DA unit to the PC at the service station in advance. Likewise, store the settings data to the control server.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step 3 Work Remarks Connect the communication cable [5] to the connector J9 [6] of the DA unit. [6] [5] F03-700-03a (when using a card reader) [6] [5] F03-700-03b (when not using a card reader) COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step 4 Work Remarks If a Card Reader-A1 is to be installed, connect the relay cable [3] connected in step 2) to the host copier. [3] F03-700-04a Connect the communication cable [5] to the host copier. [5] F03-700-04b 5 Bundle the communication cable with the cable clamp [6], and fix the clamp in place behind the DA unit. [6] F03-700-04c 3-36 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work Remarks Be sure to fix the clamp in place where it will not get in the way. 6 Secure the DA unit to the rear cover of the host copier with four screws (M4x4) [7]. (Use the screws that come with the DA unit.) [7] F03-700-05 7 For checks on operation and how to mount the cover for the DA unit, see the DA Unit-A1 Installation Procedure. COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 8 Using the Crane Transport kit If you are using the transport kit to move the machine by suspending it on a crane, perform the following: 8.1 Items to Prepare Crane Transport Kit Contents (FG6-1585-000) • Belt retaining member • Developing bias assembly protection member 4pc. 1pc. belt retaining members Developing bias assembly protection member F03-801-01 3-38 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 8.2 Procedure 8.2.1 Preventing Deformation of Externals Step Work 1 To protect the externals from deformation, remove the upper cassette, lower cassette, waste toner cover, right front cover, and front lower cover. Remarks waste toner cover upper cassette right front cover lower cassette front lower cover F03-802-01 2 Detach the right lower cover.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 8.2.2 Mounting the Belt Retaining Members Step 1 Work Remarks Fit the protrusion of the top of the belt retaining member into the T-shaped opening in the bottom plate of the machine. protrusion Belt retaining member protrusion F03-802-05 2 Slide the belt retaining member toward the center of the machine so that the 6mm dia. hole of the belt retaining member and its corresponding 4-mm dia. hole in the bottom plate match.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 8.2.3 Mounting the Developing Bias Assembly Protection Member Step 1 Work Remarks Remove the M4x8 screw used to secure the power cord base in place. screw F03-802-08 2 3 Secure the developing bias protection member(left side in the illsutration) to the power cord base using the M4x8mm screw removed in step1 as shown. Using the M4x8mm screw used to hold the rear cover, secure the developing bias assembly protection member to the rear of the base plate.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work 4 On the left side, put the belt directly to the left cover. (The left cover will warp when tension is imposed on the belt, but it will recover as soon as the belt is detached.) Remarks F03-802-12 5 On the right side, secure the harness base removed previously by means of duct tape, and put the belt directly on the base plate. 6 At the right rear, put the belt over the developing bias assembly protection member mounted previously.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work 8 Be sure to use soft cloth or cushioning material to prevent damage where the belt comes into contact with the machine. Be sure to attach a horizontal belt as shown to keep the machine level and also to prevent the machine from slipping. Remarks Suspension vertical belt Horizontal belt to prevent slippage Secure where two belts cross F03-802-16 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 1 Periodically Replaced Parts As of Dec 2000 No.
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Dust-proofing filter [4] [6] [9] Ozone filter [6] Toner filter [4] [8] [11] [2] [3] [4] [4] [2] [8] [10] [5] [5] [7] [1] [3] F04-100-01 4-2 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING As of Jan 2001 No. Parts name 12 Transfer blade 13 Primary grid 14 Primary/pre-transfer charging wire 15 Primary charging wire cleaning pad (lower) Primary charging wire cleaning pad (upper) 16 Separation/pre-fixing charging wire 17 Separation/pre-fixing charging wire cleaning pad 18 Separation/pre-fixing charging assembly gut wire 19 Cleaning blade (photosensitive drum cleaner) 20 Scoop-up sheet (photosensitive drum cleaner) 21 No.
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 2 Consumables and Durables 2.1 Copier 2.1.1 By the Copier’s Hard Counter As of Jan 2001 No. Parts name Parts number Q’ty Life 40,000 2 LT (1 L/bottle); as a rule, by the user. 50,000 To be purchased by the user. 50,000 To be purchased by the user. 50,000 To be purchased by the user. 50,000 To be purchased by the user.
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING As of Jan 2001 No. Parts name 25 Oil removing blade (fixing assembly) 26 Delivery separation claw 27 Polishing roller (transfer belt assembly) 28 Primary charging assembly 29 Developing assembly (C, M, Y) 30 Developing assembly (Bk) Memo Parts number Q’ty Life Remarks FB3-2047-000 1 200,000 FB3-3215-000 FB6-0699-000 4 1 FG6-6269-020 FG6-6276-000 4 3 200,000 300,000 50,000 in case of only twosided copy.
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 2.1.2 By the Soft Counter in Service Mode (COUNTER) As of Jan 2001 No.
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 3 Scheduled Servicing Procedure 1. As a rule, provide scheduled servicing every 50,000 copies. 2. Before setting out for a visit, check the service record, and take parts expected for replacement. Step. Work 1 2 3 Meet the person in charge. Record the counter reading. Make test copies in Direct, Reduce, and Enlarge. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Checks Check the general condition. Check the faulty copies. a. Image density b. Soiling of white background c.
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 4 Scheduled Maintenance Chart Do not use solvents or oils other than those indicated. : Replace × : Lubricate : Clean : Adjust 4.1 Copier Unit External control Scanner system Original exposure system Part Maintenance every every every every others 50,000 80,000 100,000 150,000 Copyboard glass Copyboard sheet Ozone filter Dust-proofing filter Toner filter Pre-fixing duct filter Scanner rail × Dust-proofing glass Scanner mirror (Nos.
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Unit Part Maintenance every every every others 50,000 100,000 150,000 Developing system Developing assembly upper cover (*1) Developing assembly lower cover (*2) Developing assembly casing (*2) Bearing (*2) Transfer system Transfer blade Transfer belt drive roller Transfer belt sub roller Transfer belt swing roller Internal stack removing roller Transfer web board Remarks When replacing the cleaner blade or the drum. When replacing the transfer belt.
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Unit Fixing assembly Part Maintenance every every every others 50,000 100,000 150,000 Toner scraping blade Remarks Caution : Remove the cushion rubber piece (*3) indicated in the drowing whenever you are removing the toner scraping blade. Cushion rubber Toner scraping blade F04-401-02 Oil removing blade Upper cleaning belt spring clutch When replacing the lower fixing roller.
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Unit Part Maintenance every every every others 50,000 100,000 150,000 Pick-up/feeding Pick-up roller Feeding roller system Separation roller Pre-fixing feeding (top face/belt) Transfer separation guide Registration roller releasing spring clutch × Remarks Every 500,000 copies.
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Unit Others Location Maintenance every every every others 50,000 100,000 150,000 Duplexing unit (inside) SALT sensor plastic sheet* Remarks SALT sensor SALT sensor plastic sheet F04-401-06 Transfer belt plastic sheet Transfer unit cover/ transfer belt plastic sheet (front) F04-401-07 Collect waste toner Transfer cleaner waste toner box *For details on cleaning, instructions, see CLC1000, Service Manual “Chapter 4 Mechanical System”. T04-401-05 4.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/ MALFUNCTIONS COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 1 Guide to Table In this Service Manual, work procedures are given in the form of tables instead of flow charts used generally. Familiarize yourself by studying the example below. EX. AC power is absent.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Blank page 5-2 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 1.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure Are there wavy lines on the copies? START NO Set 'PASCAL' to '0' under 'ADJUST'. NO NO Check the height of each charging wire, and clean each wire. 1. Check the separation charging assembly for dirt. 2. Check the separation charging assembly for leakage. Are there toner splashes on the copies? Execute service mode at 'TEST->PG=05 (halftone), A4, and copy count 15'.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTINS a. Checking the Transfer System b. Checking the Latent Static Image Formation System START Is the test print considerably light? NO START YES Is the locking/releasing operation of the transfer blade normal? Check HVT-1. NO Check the drive system of the transfer blade. Is uneven density or white spots noted on TYPE=4 Test Prints? NO Check the latent static image formation system.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 1.2 Points of the Scheduled Servicing Pattern reading unit (LED/shutter) Separation/Pre-fixing charging assembly Scanner rail Standard white plate Lint-free paper Blower brush Alcohol Lint-free paper Alcohol Cleaning (Note 1) Alcohol Lint-free paper Cleaning (Note 4) Blower brush Cleaning (Note 2) (Note 4) No. 1 through No.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2 Standards and Adjustments 2.1 Image-Related Parts 2.1.1 Non-Image Width The non-image width on copies made in Direct with original detection OFF must be as follows: Leading edge: 2.5 ±1.5 mm (2.5 ±2.0 mm) Left/right: 2.0 ±1.5 mm (2.0 ±1.5 mm) 2.5±1.5mm The value in parentheses refers to the second side of a two-sided copy. 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 F05-201-01 Leading Edge Non-Image Width 2.0±1.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.1.2 Image Margin The image margin on copies made in Direct with original detection OFF must be as follows: Leading edge: 2.5 ±1.5 mm (2.5 ±2.0 mm) Left/right: 2.0 ±1.5 mm (2.0 ±1.5 mm) 2.5±1.5mm The value in parentheses refers to the second side of a two-sided copy. 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 F05-201-03 Leading Edge Margin 2.0±1.5mm 0 2 4 6 8 10 F05-201-04 Left/Right Image Margin 5-8 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.1.3 Checking and Adjusting the Non-Image Width and Margin Make adjustments in the following order: • Left-right registration • Image margin • Image reading start position (ADJ-XY) • Image margin (check) a. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration 1) Make 10 copies each using all cassettes, multifeeder, duplexing unit, and paper deck, and check the left/right margin.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS • Using the Multifeeder as the source of Paper Turn the screw [1] to move the tray position so that the standard value is attained. [1] F05-201-07 • Using the Two-Sided Copies as the source of Paper Loosen the screw [1], and adjust the position of the paper guide plate so that the standard value is attained.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS [3] [2] F05-201-10 2) To move the paper in the direction of ‘b’, turn the rear adjuster [3] so that it will move down. If the displacement is excessive, turn the front adjuster [2] so that it will move up. ■ If the left/right registration fails to be as indicated using the adjusters 3) Start the copier’s service mode, and make the following selections: ‘ADJUST>FEED-ADJ’. 4) With the ‘FEED-ADJ’ screen on the display, press the Start key.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 7) Remove the four screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, remove the paper deck heater [3]. [2] [3] [1] F05-201-11 8) Loosen the two screws [1] (rear, front; 1 each) on the upper mounting plate of the side guide plate, and make adjustments. [1] [1] F05-201-12 • Do not change the paper width. • Limit the adjustment to ± 1.0 mm to prevent interference between the side guide plate and the lifter plate.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS b. Adjusting the Image Margin FEED-ADJ DISP ADJUST FUNC OPTION COUNTER UP-ADJ xxx REFE-ADJ xxx VSYC-ADJ xxx MARGN-L xxx LOW-ADJ xxx MULT-ADJ xxx DECK-ADJ xxx MARGN-R xxx MARGN-T xxx MARGN-B xxx TEST F05-201-13 1) Start service mode, and select ‘ADJUST > FEED-ADJ’. 2) While the ‘FEED-ADJ’ screen is on, press the Start key.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS c. Adjusting the Image Reading Start Position (ADJ-XY) ADJ-XY DISP COUNTER READY READY ADJ-X xxx ADJUST ADJ-Y FUNC ADJ-S xxx xxx OPTION ADJ-J xxx TEST F05-201-14 ADJ-X 20 20 ADJ-Y 1) Start service mode, and select ‘ADJUST > ADJ-XY’. 2) While the ‘ADJ-XY’ screen is on, press the Start key. • The appropriate copying mode will be set automatically, and a copy is made with a shift of about 20 mm as shown in F05-201-15.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS d. Adjusting the Pick-Up Timing (paper deck) If a discrepancy is found in the image leading edge margin on ‘LTR’ copies made using the paper deck, correct the problem by performing the following steps: 1) Place three or more sheets of ‘LTR’ paper in the paper deck. 2) Start service mode, and select ‘FUNC>P-UP-TMG’. 3) Execute ‘PK-ADJ-D’. • The machine picks up a single sheet of paper.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.1.4 Image Positioning Correction 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) • In case image position shifts in every color as well as the image positioning correction (Service Mode ‘FUNC>IMG-REG>AUTO-ADJ’) did not provide any effects on the image shift problem, follow the below procedures for adjustments. Select the service mode ‘TEST>PG>TYPE’. Set to “6 (lattice pattern)” and press the start button. (A test print will be printed out.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.2 Original Illuminating System 2.2.1 When Replacing the Scanning Lamp, Standard White Plate, Lamp Regulator, Reflecting Lamp Cover, Reader Controller PCB, Flash memory on Reader Controller PCB, or Analog Processor PCB CCD Unit 1) Execute data reading using ‘CCD’ under ‘FUNC’ in service mode. 2.2.2 Routing the Scanner Cable • 1) 2) 3) 4) You must keep the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3040-000) near at hand before routing the scanner cable.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 5) Fit a binding screw (M4 × 8mm) [3] to the pulley shaft [4] to fix the front and rear of the pulley temporarily to the side plate [5], thereby temporarily fixing the No. 2 mirror mount in place. [3] [4] [5] [5] [4] [3] F05-202-03 6) Fit the scanner cable on the pulley and the hook as indicated in F05-202-04. 1 2 3 5,7 [6] 4 6 [6] F05-202-04 • Take care not to damage the wire by the edge of the metal plate.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 7) Remove the screw [3] used in step 5. 8) Loosen the screw on the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3040-000), and extend the arm [7] fully. [7] F05-202-05 9) Set the mirror positioning tool [8] between the No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2 mirror mount; then, insert the pin [9] that comes with the mirror positioning tool. [8] [9] F05-202-06 [8] [9] F05-202-07 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 10) Using two screws [10], fit the metal fixing [10] of the scanner cable to the No. 1 mirror mount through the angular hole in the side plate. [10] [11] F05-202-08 [11] [10] F05-202-09 11) Remove the mirror positioning tool. 12) Fully tighten the four screws [7] loosened in step 6. REF. You need not adjust the cable tension. 1. Check to make sure that the scanner cable is not twisted or has not ridden over the pulley. 2. Move the No.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.3 Photosensitive Drum-Related Parts 2.3.1 Removing the Photosensitive Drum 1) Draw out the process unit mount from the copier, and remove the process unit. Points to Note When Removing the Process Unit If you have to remove the process unit, perform the following to release the cleaning blade; otherwise, the plastic sheets found inside the unit can deform.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.3.2 Points to Note When Installing the Photosensitive Drum • Make sure that the direction of the two bosses [1] on the flange shaft of the photosensitive drum and the direction of the slits [2] in the drum shaft match. To rotate the photosensitive drum, be sure to do so while lifting the process unit so that it is away from the drum. (to avoid damage to the drum) Match the slit and the protrusion.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.3.3 Points to Note When Fitting the Drum Drive Belt Fit the drum drive belt [2] so that all the markings [1] on the drum drive pulleys face the same direction. [1] [2] F05-203-05 2.4 Charging Assembly-Related Parts 2.4.1 Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire Charging assembly Height of charging wire (mm) Primary charging assembly 4 mm (approx.) 10.5±0.2 4 mm (approx.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.4.2 Points to Note When Handling the Primary Grid Plate and the Primary Charging Wire Do not clean the primary grid plate or the primary charging wire. If image faults (uneven density) occurs, replace the part. 2.5 Developing Assembly-Related Parts 2.5.1 Replacing the Developer 1) Insert the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly. 2) Turn on the power, and insert and turn the control key. 3) Start service mode, and select ‘FUNC > IN-STALL’.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 10) Install the laser shutter opening tool. Laser shutter Shutter pushing member Groove Laser shutter Laser shutter pushing member Laser shutter F05-205-02 11) Raise the hopper assembly as far as it moves, and operate the locking mechanism by hand; then, remove the hopper metal fixings (left, right). 12) Slide out the transfer assembly. 13) Place the collecting container as shown.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 14) Remove the screw, and pull out the collecting container shutter. (At this time, check to make sure that the collecting container opening is open.) Fixing screw Collecting container shutter F05-205-04 15) Select the 2nd screen of ‘FUNC > INSTALL’ in service mode. 16) To collect all four developers, press ‘RECV-4’; for each, press ‘RECV-C, M, -Y, -K’.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 23) Pour developer into the developing assembly. • Tilt the container while turning it to avoid spilling the developer. Starter F05-205-06 24) When done, press the Stop key to stop the operation of the developing assembly. 25) Install the hopper metal fixings (left, right), and release the locking mechanism of the hopper assembly; then, lower the hopper as far as the metal fixings. 26) Remove the laser shutter opening tool.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS ■ Replacement for C/M/Y 32) Execute ‘STIR-C/M/Y’ as necessary. (about 1 min) 33) Execute ‘INIT-C/M/Y’ as necessary. (about 1 min) 34) Execute ‘SINIT-C/M/Y’ as necessary. (about 1 min) 35) Execute ‘WINCLR-C, M, or -Y’. 36) Select ‘1’ by executing ‘ADJUST > PASCAL > PASCAL’. 37) Record the result on the service label. 38) Turn off and then on the power switch. 39) Execute ‘auto gradation correction (full correction)’ in user mode.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.5.3 When Replacing the Photosensitive Drum [1] 1) After replacing the cleaning blade, apply lubricant. 2) Clean the plastic film [1] under the process unit mount with lint-free paper. [1] F05-205-07 3) Install the photosensitive drum. 4) Install the drum protection sheet. 5) Install the process unit, and install the process unit mount. 6) Ready the copier, and turn on the power switch.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.5.4 When Supplying the Hopper with Toner Perform the following steps when supplying a new hopper or the existing hopper with little toner (after replacing the toner level sensor, for example) with toner so as to prevent leakage of toner from the hopper: 1) Install the hopper position metal fixings (left, right) to the copier. 2) Fix the hopper assembly to the hopper position metal fixings.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.6 Transfer Belt Unit 2.6.1 Points to Note When Replacing the Transfer Belt • Avoid touching the surface of the transfer belt (particularly, the area coming into contact with paper). If the transfer belt is soiled, wipe it with a moist cloth (or a cloth moistened with alcohol). Be sure that the belt is completely dry before installing it to the machine.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.6.2 Initializing the Transfer Belt Swing Control Data When the transfer belt is swung, the swing data is recorded for use during swinging operation. You must initialize the transfer belt swing control data using ‘FUNC > F-MISCp > E075-RLS’ in service mode whenever you have done the following: • If you have removed the transfer belt (including replacement). • If you have replaced the transfer belt swing motor.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.6.4 Adjusting the Position of the Transfer Belt-Related Solenoid a Adjusting the Position of the Transfer Blade Solenoid (SL7) Fix the solenoid in place so that the distance between the solenoid arm and the solenoid mount base is 17.8 ±0.3 mm when the plunger of the solenoid is pulled. 17.8±0.3mm F05-206-03 b. Adjusting the Position of the Oil Removing Roller Solenoid (SL18) Fix the solenoid in place so that the 2.5±0.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.7 When Replacing the Pick-Up/Feeding-Related Parts 2.7.1 Registering the Cassette/Multifeeder Paper Width Basic Setting (under ‘FUNC’) You must register the paper width basic setting if you have • Replaced the paper width VR of the copier (including the multifeeder). • Adjusted the front/rear registration for the cassette.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS b. Multifeeder 1) Set the paper guide plate of the Guide (front) multifeeder to A4R (210 mm). 2) Note that the basic setting is indicated on the CST-AD screen for ‘FUNC’ in service mode on the control panel. 3) Select the size for which you want to register the basic setting. MF-A4R 4) Note that basic setting 1 has been registered. 5) Set the paper guide plate of the multifeeder to A6R (105 mm).
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Variable resistor output A4/A3 A4R STMT-R STMT-R A4R (139.7mm) (210mm) Paper width A4 (297mm) F05-207-02 2.7.2 Orientation of the Cassette Pickup Roller When mounting the pickup roller [1] to the pickup assembly, be sure that the round marking [2] on the rubber portion is to the front of the machine. The pickup roller is identified as follows by the color of its collar: front : gold color rear : silver color Be sure to use the appropriate roller.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.7.3 Orientation of the Cassette Feed Roller When mounting the feed roller [1] to the pickup assembly, be sure that the gear [2] mounted to the feed roller is to the front of the machine. Note) Color of roller : gray [2] [1] Front of the machine F05-207-04 2.7.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.7.6 Orientation of the Paper Deck Pick-Up Roller When installing the pick-up roller to the pick-up roller shaft, make sure that the marking is to the rear. Marking Pick-up roller Front F05-207-07 2.7.7 Orientation of the Paper Deck Pick-Up/Feeding Roller When installing the pick-up/feeding roller, make sure that the marking is to the rear. Markings Bearing (one-way) Rear F05-207-08 2.7.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.7.9 Adjusting the Position of the Paper Deck Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL8001) Install the solenoid where the paper deck pick-up roller is 4.0 ±1 mm from the surface of the paper when the plunger of the solenoid is pushed in. (Keep one sheet of paper on the paper deck lifter.) Mounting plate Pick-up roller 4.0±1mm Copy paper surface (keep one sheet on Pick-up roller the paper deck lifter) releasing solenoid Adjusting screw F05-207-11 2.7.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.7.12 Adjusting the Pressure of the Multifeeder Separation Roller If double-feeding or pick-up faults occur during pick-up operation, change the position of the pressure spring [2] of the separation roller [1]. a. If double-feeding occurs, hook the pressure spring on the direction of A. b. If pick-up faults occur, hook the pressure spring on the direction of B. [1] [2] A B F05-207-13 2.7.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.7.15 Adjusting the Position of the Duplexing Unit Paper Deflecting Plate Solenoid (SL11) 1) Remove the duplexing unit. 2) Fix the solenoid in place with a mounting screw [3] after moving the solenoid to the delivery direction while the plunger [2] of the solenoid [1] is pushed in. [1] [2] [3] F05-207-16 (rear) 2.7.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.7.17 Adjusting the Position of the Duplexing Unit Feeding Roller Solenoid (SL13) Let the feeding roller drop to the bottom of the duplex feeding assembly on its own weight. At this time, fix the solenoid [3] so that the end-to-end distance between the lever [1] and the arm [2] is 1.5 ±0.5 mm when the plunger of the solenoid is pushed. [2] 1.5±0.5mm [1] [3] F05-207-19 2.7.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.7.19 Adjusting the Position of the Separation Claw Solenoid (SL15) 1) Place the delivery assembly upright. 2) Fix the solenoid in place where the distance between the E-ring [3] and the resin washer [4] is 3.5 ±0.5 mm when the plunger of the solenoid [1] is pulled by the spring [2]. [2] [4] [3] [1] m .5m ±0 3.5 F05-207-21 2.7.20 Adjusting the Position of the Upper Fixing Web Take-Up Solenoid (SL3) [1] [2] F05-207-22 [3] 20.5±0.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.7.22 Correcting Skew Movement(slope of the registration roller unit) If you must correct skew movement after replacing the registration roller unit, perform the following: 1) Remove the transfer right cover and the front right cover.(CLC1000 Service Manual>Chap 4>I. “External Control System”) 2) Loosen the two mounting screws [1] on the registration roller unit. [1] F05-207-23 3) Adjust the screw [2] used to position the fixing plate.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.8 Laser Exposure System 2.8.1 When Replacing the Laser Unit 1) Perform laser focus adjustment. 2) Perform laser power adjustment. 3) Perform laser intensity adjustment. 2.8.2 When Replacing the Video Controller PCB Nothing in particular. 2.8.3 When Replacing the BD Unit Before removing the BD unit, be sure to mark its position with a scriber. 1) Using ‘FUNC>INSTALL’, set ‘IMG-REG’ to ‘0’. 2) Turn off the power switch, and replace the BD unit.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 1) If you have replaced the laser unit for C/Bk, position the analog processor PCB as indicated in F05-208-01. Analog processor PCB Screw Claw Copyboard glass F05-208-01 2) Turn on the power switch. 3) Open the laser power checker inlet cover.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4) Set the laser power checker switch to ‘2’. 5) Insert the laser power checker with its light-receiving face oriented as indicated in F05208-03. Y e las ru nit M las er un it Lightreceiving face Lightreceiving face Laser power checker Lightreceiving face C laser unit Bk laser unit Lightreceiving face F05-208-03 6) Insert the lead wire of the laser power checker into the Digital Multimeter, and set it to the 200 mV range.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Making Adjustments 1) Turn the volumes VR1 through VR8 on the laser unit fully clockwise. VR1 : 1/2 Power VR2 : Power VR3 : 800-P00 VR4 : 800-PFF VR5 : 400-P00 VR6 : 400-PFF VR7 : 200-P00 266-P00 VR8 : 200-PFF 266-PFF VR8 VR6 VR4 VR2 VR5 VR3 VR1 VR7 F05-208-04 Y/Bk Laser Unit VR2 VR4 VR6 VR8 VR1 VR3 VR5 VR7 F05-208-05 C/M Laser Unitm 5-48 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2) Start service mode, and execute ‘1/2 POWER’ of ‘LASER’ under ‘FUNC’. 3) Turn VR1 counterclockwise so that the reading of the Digital Multimeter is ‘20.0 ±0.2 mV’. (Take care not to turn too fast; the reading will increase abruptly at a certain point.) 4) Press the Stop key to stop the laser output. 5) Execute ‘POWER’ of ‘6 LASER’ under ‘FUNC’. 6) Turn VR2 counterclockwise so that the reading of the Digital Multimeter is ‘44.8 ±0.4 mV’.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 11) Likewise, adjust the following volumes: • Execute the following in service mode, and use VR5: ‘FUNCTION>LASER>400-P00’ • Execute the following in service mode, and use6: ‘FUNCTION>LASER>400-PFF’ 12) Likewise, adjust the following volumes: • For Bk/Y laser unit, Execute the following in service mode, and use VR7: ‘FUNC>LASER>266-P00’ Execute the following in service mode, and use VR8: ‘FUNC>LASER> 266-PFF’ • For C/M laser unit, Execute the following in
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2) Perform focusing adjustments by turning the lens assembly once again according to the values recorded on the label. For instance, if the value is “+2/ 8,” turn the lens assembly in the positive direction (counterclockwise when viewing from the end of the lens assembly) over two notches. Feed length label 8 R FS6-8028 F05-208-08 Positive direction F05-208-09 3) Tighten the locking nut [3], and fix the position of the lens in place.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.9 Fixing Assembly-Related Parts 2.9.1 Points to Note When Replacing the Fixing Heater • Do not touch the surface of the heater. REF. Neither fixing heater (upper/ lower) has any specific front/ rear orientation. 2.9.2 Adjusting the Nip (fixing pressure adjusting nut) Check to make sure that the nip width is as indicated in T04-209-01. If not, turn the adjusting screw to adjust.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Taking Measurements 1) Start service mode. 2) Select ‘NIP-CHK’ of ‘FUSER’ under ‘FUNC’. 3) Select ‘NIP-CHK=1’. 4) Press the Start key to execute. (The operation will stop automatically.) 5) Measure the dimensions indicated in F04-203-02 as a, b, and c. 2.9.3 Adjusting the Mounting Position of the External Paper Delivery Unit Guide Plate 1) Remove the left cover. 2) Open the front cover.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.10 Electrical 2.10.1 When Replacing Major Parts a. When Replacing the ROM on the DC Controller PCB or the Reader Controller PCB (The term “reader controller” or the “DC controller” within parentheses indicates work unique to the respective PCB.) 1) Turn on the power switch. 2) Record the settings of the user mode. (reader controller) 3) Set ‘IMG-REG’ on the second page of the INSTALLL screen under ‘FUNC’ in service mode from ‘1’ to ‘0’.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS b. When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB 1) Initialize the RAM on the reader controller PCB. (See the appropriate instructions.) 2) Turn off and on the power switch. c. When Replacing the DC Controller PCB 1) Start service mode, and check to make sure that ‘DISP > BLT-DRFT > BELT-POS’ is ‘CENTER’; if not, move the transfer belt to the center. 2) Turn off the power switch. 3) Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS The settings on the screens of service mode are cleared when the RAM on the reader controller PCB is initialized.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS e. Initializing the RAM on the Reader Controller PCB 1) Record the settings of user mode. 2) Execute ‘FUNC>R-CON>RAM-CLR’ in service mode. (The power switch will automatically turn off.) 3) Turn on the power switch. 4) Execute ‘FUNC>CCD>AUTO-ADJ’ in service mode. (about 8 min) 5) If a projector is installed, execute ‘FUNC>PROJ-ADJ>PROJ-CCD’ in service mode. 6) Enter any new user mode settings and the settings recorded in B of the service label.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS h. After Replacing the Pick-Up Motor/Pick-Up Unit 1) Place three or more A4 or LTR sheets of paper in the cassette (upper, lower). 2) Select ‘FUNC > P-UP-TMG’ in service mode. 3) Execute ‘PK-ADJ-U’ three times. • A value near ‘186’ will be indicated under ‘DATA-A’ and ‘PUDT-U’. 4) Press ‘D-SEND-U’ to write the adjustment data in RAM. 5) Execute ‘PK-ADJ-L’ three times. • A value near ‘104’ will be indicated under ‘DATA-L’ and ‘PUDT-L’.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 14) Press the Reset key. 15) Turn off the power switch. 16) Connect J1 of the environment measurement PCB. 17) Remove the environment measurement sensor from the environment measurement PCB, and insert the environment sensor. 18) Install all covers. b. Checking the Environment Sensor 1) Check the environment PCB. 2) Turn on the power switch, and leave it on for 5 min. 3) Start service mode, and select ‘DISPLAY’.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.10.3 Checking the High Voltage Control System a. Outline If an image fault occurs, you must first determine whether the cause is the latent static formation block which includes the photosensitive drum and the potential control system or the developing/transfer system. The CLC5000’s high-voltage is controlled to a specific level using the environment sensor and the potential sensor.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 2.10.4 Checking the Photointerrupters The CLC1000 allows you to use a conventional meter or service mode when checking its photointerrupters. a. Using a Meter 1) Set the meter to the 30VDC range. 2) Connect the – probe of the meter to J101-7 (GND) of the DC control PCB. 3) Connect the + probe to the terminals (on the DC controller PCB or the deck controller PCB) shown on the pages that follow. 4) Make checks according to the instructions given. b.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4) Set the laser power checker switch to ‘2’.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Sensor PS 12 PS 13 PS 14 PS 15 PS 17 PS 18 PS 19 PS 20 PS 21 PS 22 Name Service mode Checks • Transfer belt lifter sensor 1 80000 bit 0 Transfer belt lifter sensor 2 80000F bit1 Post registration paper sensor 800007 bit 0 Separation sensor 800007 bit 1 Transfer belt edge sensor 1 80000F bit 2 Transfer belt edge sensor 2 80000F bit 3 Transfer belt edge sensor 3 80000F bit 4 Transfer belt edge sensor 4 80000F bit 5 Pick-
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Sensor PS 23 PS 24 PS 25 PS 26 PS 27 PS 28 PS 29 PS 30 PS 31 PS 32 5-64 Name Service mode Cassette 1 paper sensor 80000B bit 4 Cassette 1 lifter sensor 80000A bit 0 Pick-up vertical path 2 sensor 800006 bit 2 Pick-up vertical path 3 sensor 800006 bit 3 Cassette 2 lifter sensor 80000A bit 1 Cassette 2 paper sensor 80000B bit 5 80000A bit 6 800008 bit 0 Duplex paper sensor 80000B 2 bit 7 Delivery vertical path sensor 2
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Sensor PS 33 PS 34 PS 35 PS36 PS 37 PS38 PS 39 PS40 PS 41 PS 42 PS 8001 Name Service mode Duplex reversal sensor 800007 Checks ‘1’ when paper is present in the duplexing reversing assembly. • ‘0’ when absent. Delivery sensor • ‘1’ when paper is put over the delivery 800007 bit3 sensor. • ‘0’ otherwise. Internal delivery • ‘1’ when paper is put over the internal sensor 800007 bit 2 delivery sensor. • ‘0’ otherwise.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3 Troubleshooting Image Problems 3.1 Initial Checks 3.1.1 Checking the Site of Installation a. Make sure that the voltage at the power source is as rated (±10%). b. Make sure that the site is not subject to high temperature/humidity (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier) and is not cold, not close to a source of fire, and not subject to dust. c. Make sure that the site is not subject to ammonium gas. d.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.1.7 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts a. Check the periodically replaced parts against the Scheduled Servicing Chart, and replace those that reached the end of their lives. 3.1.8 Others When a machine is brought from a cold to a warm place in winter, its inside can start to develop condensation, leading to various problems. a.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.2.5 Halftone Band The color is not appreciably different from the original (Test Sheet). Further, the band as a whole is not appreciably uneven*, and the color does not differ appreciably between left and right. *Moire, if found, may be ignored. 3.2.6 Fogging The white area must not be foggy. Gray scale No. 1 through No. 3: dark area No. 4 through No. 6: halftone area No. 7 through No.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS F05-302-02 Standard Image Sample COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.3 Test Prints The CLC1000 possesses nine types of test print patterns, enabling identification of an error in reference to each test print pattern. If a fault on a copy made normally does not appear on a test print, you may suspect the original exposure system, CCD, analog processor, or image processor. 3.3.1 Selecting a Test Pattern 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Set the copy count and copy size. Start service mode.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS PGTYPE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Description Image from CCD (regular copying) For R&D 256 colors 256 gradations 17 gradations Total halftone page Grid For image position correction For R&D For R&D MCYBk horizontal stripe (laser FF activation) For R&D For R&D For R&D Full color in 17 gradations Not used Not used For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D T05-303-01 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.3.2 256-Color Test Print (PGTYPE=02) Use the 256-color test print to check the hues. For the 256-color test print, the 16×16 frames from the leading edge of the copy paper represent 256 colors; all frames that follow are repetitions of the first set. a. Hues of the 256 Colors The print must show the hues shown in F05-303-01.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.3.3 256-Gradation Test Print (PGTYPE=03) Use the 256-gradation test print to check gradation and balance between colors. a. Gradation You may check the gradation of all densities from density 0 to density 255. b. Balance between Colors (3-color copying) Select 3-color mode, and generate a test print to check the gray balance of all densities from density 0 to density 255.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.3.4 17-Gradation Test Print (PGTYPE=04) Use the 17-gradation test print to check gradation, fogging, white lines, uneven density between left and right, and balance between colors. a. Gradation If the gradation of density is not as shown in F05-303-03, suspect a fault in the developing assembly or the laser system. b.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.3.5 Halftone Test Print (PGTYPE=05) Use the halftone test print to check transfer faults (failure), black lines, white lines, and uneven intervals. a. Transfer Faults (failure) If a transfer fault is noted, suspect a fault in the transfer belt or the static eliminating assembly. b. Black Lines If black lines are noted, suspect scratches on the photosensitive drum or dirt on the primary charging wire. c.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS F05-303-04 5-76 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.3.6 Grid Test Print (PGTYPE=06) Use the grid test print to check color displacement, right angles, and straight lines. a. Color Displacement If color displacement is noted, suspect a fault in the transfer belt. Color displacement on this test print does not necessarily mean color displacement on regular copies because of black text processing. The mechanisms are normal as long as color displacement is not noted on regular copies.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.3.7 Image Position Correction Pattern (PGTYPE=07) Use this test print to check whether the image position correction pattern is normal or otherwise. C pattern M pattern Y pattern Bkpattern F05-303-06 5-78 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.3.8 Horizontal Stripe (FF activation) Test Print (PGTYPE=10) Use the horizontal stripe test print to check the dark area density of each color, balance between colors, and white lines (development). a. Dark Area Density of Each Color and Balance between Colors The density must not be appreciably light. If a mono color copy is light, suspect a fault in the developer or the transfer blade.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.3.9 Full Color 17-Gradation (YMCBk+RGB+gray) Test Print (PGTYPE=14) Use the full-color 17-gradation test print to check gray balance, gradation of CMYBk, and gradation of RGB mono, and fogging. a. Gray Balance Check to make sure that each color is reproduced at an even density over the gray scale. To make adjustments, use the contrast potential. b. Gradation Check gradation of CMYBk and RGB mono and difference in density. c.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Service mode 7) Are the settings of ‘CCD’ in service mode as indicated on the service label? NO: Enter the correct settings. 8) Execute ‘FUNC > CCD > AUTO-ADJ’. Is the problem corrected? NO: Try replacing the image processor and the analog processor. Developing assembly 9) Is uneven density noted in all colors? NO: Check the developing assembly and the developing cylinder for which uneven density is noted; if a fault is found, clean or replace it.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.4.4 The copy has uneven density (horizontal). 1) Clean the primary charging assembly, dust-proofing glass, reflecting mirror, and lens. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. 2) Is the output image of the halftone print (PGYTPE=5) normal? YES: Go to step 11. Moire 3) Is the image uneven because of moire*? * Pattern interference that occurs when copying originals printed in dots. YES: Decrease ‘Photo Sharpness’, and store the setting in standard mode.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.4.5 The copy has fogging. Perform the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure. If fogging occurs in K at the 100th to 5000th copy after the replacement of developer in a low humidity environment, perform any of the following: 1. Decrease the setting of the following: ‘ADJUST>ADJ-MISC>K-DOFST’ Make five copies of the Test Print (type 5, DENS-K=255, COLOR-K=1, COLOR-Y/M/ C=0; copy count=1).
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Photosensitive drum cleaner (poor cleaning) 6) Is there paper or foreign matter on the cleaning blade of the photosensitive drum cleaner assembly? YES: Remove the foreign matter, and clean the cleaning blade and the outside of the cleaner assembly. 7) Is there deformation or damage on the edge of the cleaning blade? Feel the edge of the cleaning blade with a finger to check.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Optical path 15) Clean the standard white plate, scanning lamp, and reflecting lamp cover mirror. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. 16) Remove the CCD cover, and clean the surface of the CCD with a blower brush. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the CCD unit. Pre-exposure lamp, Optical path (dirt) 17) Does the pre-exposure lamp have a fault? YES: Remove the cause, and replace the part. NO: Clean the bending mirror and the folding mirror.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.4.7 The copy has white streaks/white lines (vertical : the sub scanning direction). 1) Generate a halftone test print (PGTYPE=5). Are there vertical white streaks/white lines? If in all colors, go to step 11. If in a specific color, go to the next step. NO: Go to step 13. Developing assembly 2) Check the cylinder of the developing assembly for which white streaks/white lines are noted.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Transfer unit 12) Are there scratches or fault on the transfer belt? YES: Replace the transfer belt. If soiled with toner, clean it. 13) Are there scratches or fault on the transfer blade? YES: Replace the transfer blade. Separation assembly 14) Clean the separation assembly. Is the problem corrected? YES: End.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.4.8 The copy has horizontal streaks/horizontal fogging (the main scanning direction). 1) Generate a halftone test print (PGTYPE=5). Are there vertical white streaks/white lines? If in all colors, go to step 6. If in a specific color, go to the next step. NO: Go to step 4. Photosensitive drum 2) Are there scratches or dirt in the peripheral direction of the axis of the photosensitive drum? YES: Replace the photosensitive drum.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS ■ Horizontal Streaks No. Color/location (A3) 1 Specific color (dark, horizontal lines). Specific color (light, horizontal lines). Drum 3 All colors 4 Specific color; leading edge (black lines as if made by rubbing). 5 Specific color 30 mm Dirt exists on the (approx.) decurling roller (upper). The trailing edge of curled paper touched the separation charging assembly. Random The output of the developing bias is faulty.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.4.9 The copy has white spots (horizontal : the main scanning direction). Rail on mirror mount, Cable of original exposure system 1) Generate a halftone test print (PG-TYPE=5). Is the problem noted? If all colors, go to step 6. If a specific color, go to the next step. NO: • Clean the rail of the mirror mount. • Check the cable of the scanning system. Developing assembly 2) Check the developing cylinder. Is it normal? NO: Replace the developing assembly.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.4.10 The copy has white spots. 1) Is there a small lump of toner in the middle of a spot? YES: Go to step 6. Developing assembly 2) Generate a halftone test print (PGTYPE=5). Is the problem noted? If all colors, go to step 4. If a specific color, go to the next step. NO: Check the developing assembly and the developing cylinder for which the problem is noted; if a fault is found, clean or replace it.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.4.11 The copy has white spots (trailing center). A trailing center white spot is a type of transfer failure and is found at the center of the trailing edge of a copy. Trailing center spot Copy paper F05-304-02 ■ Trailing Center White Spot A trailing center white spot is caused by warping of paper. The leading edge of such paper is retained on the transfer belt without uniform contact, causing its trailing edge to warp.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.4.12 The copy has white spots (meandering). Separation charging wire 1) Clean the separation charging wire. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Separation charging assembly 2) Is leakage, poor contact, or wrong charging wire height noted for the separation charging assembly? YES: Remove the fault. Environment sensor 3) Check the machine inside temperature using ‘ANALOG’ under ‘DISP’ in service mode.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Cleaning fault 4) Is the cleaning blade of the photosensitive drum locked? NO: Lock and fix in position the cleaning blade of the cleaning assembly. 5) Is foreign matter found on the cleaning blade of the photosensitive drum cleaning assembly? YES: Remove the foreign matter, and clean the cleaning blade and the cleaner assembly externals.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.4.14 The copy has poor fixing. Upper roller, Lower roller 1) Is the problem in the same direction as the feeding direction of the copy? YES: 1. Check the upper/lower roller of the fixing assembly for scratches. 2. Check the separation claw to see if it is positioned correctly. Heater 2) Does the heater (H1, H2) turn ON at power-on? NO: See “The fixing heater fails to operate.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.4.15 The copy has bleeding toner (during fixing). The term bleeding toner refers to spreading of toner immediately following (in relation to feeding direction) a high-density area of a copy. High-density area Feeding direction Bleeding toner F05-304-03 Separation charging wire, Pre-fixing charging wire Clean the separation charging wire and the pre-fixing charging wire. Is the problem corrected? YES: End.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.4.16 The copy is blank. 1) Generate a horizontal test print (PG-TYPE=10). Is the image normal? YES: Check the wiring of the following PCBs; if normal, replace it. • Analog processor PCB • Video controller PCB • Image processor PCB • CCD unit Potential control fault 2) Execute ‘FUNC > EPC’ in service mode. Is the copy image generated immediately after the execution normal? YES: End.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.4.17 The copy is solid black. 1) Generate a horizontal stripe test print (PGTYPE=10). Is the image normal? YES: Go to step 6. Potential control fault 2) Execute ‘EPC’ under ‘FUNC’ in service mode. Is the copy image immediately after the execution normal? YES: End. Primary charging unit 3) Is the primary charging unit installed properly? NO: Replace the high-voltage cord.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS DC power supply CCD unit, Analog processor PCB, Image processor PCB 9) Is DC power present between the following terminals of the analog processor? J2504-7 (+) — 8 (–): +5V J2504-5 (+) — 4 (–): +8V J2504-3 (+) — 4 (–): +8V J2504-1 (+) — 2 (–): +15V NO: See “The DC power is absent.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.4.18 The copy has color displacement. 1) Set ‘FUNC > IMG-REG > AUTO-ADJ’ in service mode to ‘ON’. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Transfer belt 2) Does the transfer belt have dents or deformation? YES: Replace it. Retention 3) Does the C transfer blade have dents or deformation? YES: Replace it. 4) Is the operation of the locking mechanism of the C transfer blade normal? NO: Remove the cause of the fault.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.4.19 The copy has image blur 1) Generate a test print (PGTYPE-10). Is the image normal? YES: Go to step 3. Drive on Printer side 2) Check the following • Is the photosensitive drum drive gear worn? • Does the flywheel wobble? • Does the transfer belt have dents or deformation? Drive on Reader 3) Set ‘OPT > R-OPT > SCAN-DWN’ in service mode. Is the problem corrected after the value is set below ‘1’ ? NO: Check the following.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.4.20 Adjusting the Image Leading Laser write start position transfer high voltage application timing 1) Generate a test print (PGTYPE-10). Is the image normal? YES: Go to step 3. Original read start position 2) Adjust the setting in service mode, i.e., use a lower setting: ‘ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>VSYC-ADJ’. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. 3) Execute image read position adjustment (ADJ-Y). (Refer to 2.1.3.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4 Troubleshooting 4.1 Troubleshooting Malfunctions 4.1.1 E000/E004 • Check the detail code of ‘E000/E004’ using ‘DISPLAY > JAM/ERR’ in service mode. a. E000–XX01, XX02 (high-order 2 digits representing type as XX=01 indicating upper heater and 02, lower heater) and E004=0001 1) Clear ‘E000’. *1 Is ‘E000’ indicated immediately after the power switch is turned ON? • Be sure to turn OFF the power switch immediately after the check. NO: Go to step 3.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS b. E000–XX05 (upper order 2 digits indicate the top/bottom; XX=01: upper heater; 02: lower heater) 1) Clear ‘E000’. Is ‘E000’ indicated immediately after the power switch is turned on? •Be sure to turn off the power switch as soon as you have made the check. Thermistor 2) Is the thermistor in even contact with the upper/lower fixing roller? NO: Mount it correctly.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS c. E000–XX20, XX30, XX40, XX50 (high-order 2 digits representing type as XX=01 indicating upper heater and 02, lower heater) 1) Clear ‘E000’ (*), and turn ON the power switch. Does the fixing heater turn ON? • Check by the eye. Be sure to turn OFF the power switch immediately after the check. NO: See “The fixing heater fails to turn on.” YES: Go to step 7.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS d. E000–0061, 0071, 0081 1) Clear ‘E000’. Is ‘E000’ indicated immediately after the power switch is turned on? • Be sure to turn off the power switch as soon as you have made the check. NO: Go to step 3. Oil thermistor (TH5), Oil heater thermistor (TH6; short circuit), DC controller PCB 2) Turn off the power switch, and disconnect J6019 from J2209 on the DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS e. E000–0062, 0072, 0082 1) Clear ‘E000’. Is ‘E000’ indicated immediately after the power switch is turned on? • Be sure to turn off the power switch as soon as you have made the check. NO: Go to step 3. Thermistor (open circuit) 2) Open the front cover and the delivery assembly to cool the fixing oil.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.2 E005 Cleaning web 1) Is the cleaning web more or less used up? YES: Replace the cleaning web. Counter 2) After replacing the cleaning web, has ‘FUNC > FUSER > E005RLS’ in service mode been executed? NO: Execute ‘FUNC > FUSER > E005-RLS’ in service mode. Detecting lever (position) 3) Is the detecting lever of the web length sensor on the web? NO: Re-mount it.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.4 E008 Fixing oil 1) Does the oil case have an adequate amount of fixing oil? NO: Supply oil. Fixing oil supply route 2) Is the hose from the oil case to the upper oil pan clogged with dust? YES: Remove the clogging; or, replace the part. Fixing oil level detect sensor (PS6) 3) Is the fixing oil level detect sensor (PS6) normal? (Check as when checking a photointerrupter.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.5 E012 1) Does the photosensitive drum motor (M21) rotate during initial rotation? YES: Go to step 4. Excess load 2) Slide out the primary charging assembly, and check the condition of the cleaning blade by the naked eye. (Do not slide out the process unit.) Is the cleaning blade bent? YES: Put a finger through the primary charging assembly slot, and push the blade support plate to correct the bend; then, slide out the process unit.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.6 E013 • Check the detail code of ‘E013’ using ‘DISPLAY > JAM/ERR’ in service mode. Waste toner feeding screw 1) Is ‘0002’ indicated? YES: The waste toner case is full, imposing excess load on the waste toner feeding screw. Remove the waste toner as shown under “F013-0002.” Waste toner feeding motor (M20) DC controller PCB 2) Set the meter to the 12VDC range.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3) Tap the waste toner vertical pipe [2] with a screwdriver so that the toner will fall from the pipe. [2] F05-401-02 4) Turn the waste toner feeding motor [3] in the direction of the arrow so that the screw gear [5] moves away from the microswitch lever [4]. (If it does not move, the pipe is still filled with waste toner. Perform step 3) once again.) [4] [5] [3] F05-401-03 5) Turn on the power switch.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.7 E014 Fixing roller drive assembly, Fixing oil applying roller drive assembly, Feeding drive assembly 1) Is there a fault on the fixing roller (upper, lower), fixing oil applying roller, or the drive assembly of the feeding assembly? Or, is any of them subjected to excess load? YES: Replace any faulty part, and remove the cause of the fault. Fixing motor (M9) DC controller PCB 2) Set the meter to the 12VDC range.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.9 E017 Duplexing feeding drive assembly 1) Is there a fault (e.g., excess load) in the roller drive assembly driven by the duplexing unit feeding motor? YES: Remove the cause of the fault. Duplex feed motor (M19) DC controller PCB 2) Set the meter to the 24VDC range.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.11 E020 • Check the detail code of ‘E020’ using ‘JAM/ERR’ under ‘DISPLAY’ in service mode. a. E020=XX30, XX31, XX35, XX36, XX3A, XX3B, XX40, XX41, XX42, XX43, XX45, XX46, XX47, XX48, XX50, XX55, XXA0, XXA1, XXA5, XXA6, XXAA, XXB0, XXB1, XXB2, XXB5, XXB6, XXB7 XXBF (high-order 2 digits representing the color as XX=00 indicating all colors; 01, C; 02, M; 03, Y; and 04, Bk.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS b. E020–XX60, XX70 Photosensitive drum 1) Is the photosensitive drum soiled? YES: Replace the cleaning blade. Be sure to clean the SALT sensor as well. SALT sensor 2) Clean the window of the SALT sensor. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Check the wiring from the DC controller PCB to the SALT sensor; if normal, replace the SALT sensor. c.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS e. E020–XX4A, XX4B, XX4C, XX4D, XXBA, XXBB, XXBC, XXBD, XXD0, XXE0 1) Perform “Checking E020” on the next page. Is ‘E020’ still indicated? NO: End. Developing assembly (uneven toner density) 2) Execute ‘FUNC > INSTALL > STIR-C/M/Y/K’ in service mode for the color in question. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Developer 3) Replace the developer of the color for which ‘E020’ is indicated, and execute ‘FUNC > INSTALL > INIT’.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS f. E020/XXF1, 04F2 1) Is the detailed code ’04F2'? YES: Go to step 4. CMY hopper 2) Is the level of toner inside the hopper for which ‘E020’ is indicated above the toner sensor? YES: Replace the hopper. (To supply toner, see Service Handbook of CLC1000 > Chapter 2 > E. Developing Assembly-Related Parts > 1. Replacing the Developer.) CMY error sensor 3) Disconnect the connector of the toner level sensor (front of toner).
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.12 E023 1) Check the detail code of E023 using ‘DISPLAY > JAM/ERR’ in service mode. Developing assembly 2) Remove the developing assembly for which ‘E023’ is indicated. Turn the cylinder gear in its normal direction (Counter clockwise). Does it turn smoothly? NO: Check the inside of the developing assembly for foreign matter. Check the drive system for damage to gear.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.14 E040 • Check the detail code of ‘E040’ using ‘DISPLAY > JAM/ERR’ in service mode. a. E040-0001, 0002 Cassette size detecting switch 1) Is the size of the cassette indicated on the message display? NO: Check the cassette size detecting switch. Gear, Lever 2) Slide out the cassette, and move the lifter up by hand. Does it move smoothly? NO: Remove the pick-up assembly, and check the gear and lever.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS b. E040–0101, 0102 Drive gear Lever 1) Is the up/down movement of the lifter of the multifeeder smooth? (See the descriptions on how to release the lifter.) NO: Check the drive gear and the lever. Lifter sensor (PS2, PS3) 2) Is the lifter sensor (PS2, PS3) normal? (See the instructions on how to check photointerrupters.) NO: Check the lever and the wiring; if normal, replace the sensor.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.15 E041 • • Take note of the position of the lifter when ‘E041’ is indicated. Check the detail code of ‘E041’ using ‘DISPLAY > JAM/ERR’ in service mode. a. E041-0001, 0003 1) Has the lifter moved up to push the switch when ‘E041’ is indicated? NO: Go to step 3. Lifter upper limit switch (SW8001) 2) Turn OFF and ON the power switch to clear ‘E041’.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS b. E041–0002, 0003 1) Is the lifter down and pushing the switch when ‘E041’ is indicated? NO: Go to step 3. Lifter lower limit switch (SW8002) 2) Turn OFF and ON the power switch to clear ‘E041’. Does bit 5 of address 801004 under ‘DISPLAY > SENSOR’ in service mode change when the lifter lower limit switch (SW8002) is pressed by a finger? NO: Check the wiring from the switch to the DC controller PCB; if normal, replace the sensor.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.17 E050 Duplexing paper jogging guide home position sensor (PS29) 1) Is the sensor normal? (See the instructions on how to check photointerrupters.) NO: Replace the sensor. Operation (faulty) 2) Is there any obstacle in the operation path of the duplexing unit stacking guide? YES: Remove it. Duplexing paper jogging guide motor (M23) DC controller PCB 3) Replace the motor. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB. 4.1.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Primary charging assembly 6) Is the primary charging assembly inserted properly? NO: Re-install it. 7) Are the charging wires of the primary charging assembly and the pre-primary charging assembly broken? YES: Re-install the charging wire. 8) Are the charging wires of the primary charging assembly and the pre-primary charging assembly soiled? YES: Clean them or re-install them.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.19 E062 • Check the detail code of ‘E062’ using ‘DISPLAY > JAM/ERR’ in service mode. a. XX01 AC driver PCB 1) Turn OFF and ON the power. Is ‘E062’ indicated? NO: End. DC controller PCB 2) Replace the AC driver PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB. b. XX02 1) Turn OFF and ON the power switch. Is ‘E062’ indicated? NO: End.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.20 E072 Transfer belt cleaning web rotation sensor (PS10) 1) Is the sensor normal? (Check the instructions on how to check photointerrupters.) NO: Replace the sensor. Operation (faulty) 2) Turn the web drive shaft by a finger. Does it turn smoothly? NO: Remove the cause of poor rotation. Transfer belt cleaning web motor (M12) DC controller PCB 3) Turn OFF and ON the power switch; then, select two-sided copying mode, and press the Start key.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.22 E074 Transfer belt lifter sensor 1 (PS12), 2 (PS13) 1) Is the sensor normal? (See the instructions on how to check photointerrupters.) NO: Replace the sensor. Operation (faulty) 2) Turn the transfer belt lifter drive shaft by a finger. Does it turn smoothly? NO: Remove the cause of the faulty rotation. Sensor (position) 3) Turn OFF and ON the power switch to clear ‘E074’.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.23 E075 • Check the detail code of ‘E075’ using ‘DISPLAY > JAM/ERR’ in service mode. a. E075–0001, 0002, 0003, 0004 Transfer belt edge sensor (PS17, PS18, PS19, PS20) 1) Is the sensor represented by the detail code in question normal? (See the instructions on how to check photointerrupters.) NO: Check the operation; if normal; replace the sensor.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Transfer belt cleaning web 4) Is the web shaft of the transfer belt cleaning web fitted correctly in the bushing? If the web shaft [2] is not correctly fitted to the bushing when the cleaning belt web [1] is mounted, the web will come into uneven contact with the transfer belt, causing the transfer belt to malfunction (‘E075’). NO: Mount the web shaft correctly.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Polishing roller 7) Is the polishing roller mounted normally? If the polishing roller [1] is fixed in position overriding the emboss [2] next to the fixing screw, the roller will come into uneven contact with the transfer belt, causing the transfer belt to malfunction (‘E075’). NO: Mount the polishing roller correctly.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Internal static eliminating roller 9) Is the internal static eliminating roller mounted correctly? If the internal static eliminating roller [1] is secured in position with the push-on spring [2] detached, the roller will come into uneven contact with the transfer belt, causing the transfer belt to malfunction (‘E075’). NO: Mount the internal static eliminating roller correctly.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Transfer assembly (releasing) 11) Was the transfer assembly released while the transfer belt was rotating during servicing work? If the transfer assembly releasing lever is freed before the transfer belt stops to rotate after service work conducted with the help of the cover switch actuator, ‘E073’ or ‘E075’ will occur when the transfer unit is slid out. YES: Check to make sure that the machine has stopped operating before sliding out the transfer unit.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.24 E076 1) Execute ‘FUNC>F-MISCP>MTR>13’ in service mode to rotate the transfer cleaner web motor (M12). Does the motor rotate? YES: Go to step 3. Overload 2) Turn the transfer cleaner web by hand. Is the rotation heavy? NO: Check the transfer cleaner web drive system. Transfer cleaner web motor (M12) DC controller PCB 3) Set the meter to the 5VDC range, and measure the voltage between J2218-A1 (+: M12ON) and J2218-A4 (-: GND).
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.26 E100 a. E100-xx01 Laser shutter 1) Is the operation of the laser shutter normal? NO: Replace the faulty part. DC power supply PCB 1 (lower) 2) Is power present at J2101 on the DC controller PCB? J2101-1 (+) — J2101-4 (–): 5V J2101-8 (+) — J2101-9 (–): 8V J2101-7 (+) — J2101-8 (–): –12V NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the DC power supply PCB 1 (lower).
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS b. E100–xx02 DC power supply PCB 1 (lower) 1) Is power present at J2101 on the video controller PCB? J2101-1 (+) — J2101-4 (–): 5 V J2101-8 (+) — J2101-9 (–): 8 V J2101-7 (+) — J2101-8 (–): -12 V NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the DC power supply PCB (lower).
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.27 E110 DC power supply PCB 1 (upper) 1) Is power present at J6297 on the laser scanner motor driver PCB? J6297-3 (+) — J6297-1 (–): 35V J6297-4 (+) — J6297-2 (–): 35V NO: Check the wiring: if normal, replace the DC power supply PCB 1 (upper).
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS b. E194–0001, 0002 Shutter drive motor (M25) 1) Execute ‘FUNC > F-MISCp > MTR’ in service mode to operate the shutter. Does the shutter drive motor operate normally? YES: Check the drive system; if normal, replace the motor. Shutter open sensor (PS40) 2) Is the shutter open sensor (PS40) normal? (in the case of E1940001) NO: Replace the sensor. YES: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS ■ Correcting E194-0001/0002 1) Turn off the power switch. 2) Open the front cover. 3) Remove the image position correction CCD unit. (See the descriptions under “Removing the Image Position Correction CCD Unit” in Service Manual of CLC1000,Chapter 4.) 4) Remove the screw [2], and remove the support plate (front) [1]. 5) Remove the screw [4], and remove the shutter [3]. (At this time, take care not to deform the grounding plate [5].
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.29 E220 1) Does the scanning lamp turn ON? NO: See “The scanning lamp fails to turn ON.” Lamp regulator PCB Reader unit controller PCB 2) Is there a fault in the connection between J1306B on the reader unit controller PCB and J450 on the lamp regulator PCB? YES: Re-connect it. NO: Replace the following parts in the order indicated: • Lamp regulator PCB • Reader unit controller PCB 4.1.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.32 E350 Connector 1) Is the connection between the reader controller PCB and the ECOID PCB normal? NO: Connect the PCBs correctly. ECO-PCB Reader controller PCB 2) Replace the ECO-ID PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the reader controller PCB. 4.1.33 E351 Connector 1) Is the connection between the analog processor PCB and the image processor PCB normal? NO: Connect the PCBs correctly.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.34 E517 a. E517-0001 through -0005 Solenoid 1) Disconnect the connector of the upward curl removing solenoid (SL5/6), and the solenoid side for electrical continuity. Is there continuity? YES: Go to step 2. NO: Replace the solenoid without electrical continuity. Sensor 2) Try replacing the upper phase sensor (PS4/5). Does the error disappear? NO: Replace the buffer pass driver PCB. b.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.35 E620 Connector wiring 1) Is there a fault in the connection of the ED PCB, memory PCB, or image processor PCB? NO: Re-connect it. YES: Replace the following parts in the order indicated: • ED PCB • Memory PCB • Image processor PCB 4.1.36 E700 Malfunction 1) Turn off and then on the power switch. Is the problem corrected? YES: End.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.37 E718 Connector, Wiring 1) Are the connection and the wiring of the following connector normal? Projector Controller PCB: J103 NO: Re-connect it. Projector controller PCB 2) Set the meter to the 12VDC range, and measure the voltage between J107-1 (+; 5 V) and J107-2 (–; GND) on the projector controller PCB. Does it change from about 0 V to about 5 V when projector mode starts? YES: Go to step 8.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Projector controller PCB Reader unit controller PCB 8) Replace the projector controller PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the reader controller PCB. 4.1.38 E800 Malfunction 1) Turn OFF and ON the power switch. Is the problem corrected? YES: End Power switch (SW2) DC controller PCB 2) Try replacing the power switch (SW2).
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.41 E807 Fan DC controller PCB Reader controller PCB 1) Try replacing the fan identified by the detail code. Is the problem corrected? Detail code Fan 0001 laser cooling fan(FM4/5) 0002 laser scanner motor cooling fan(FM24) 0003 digital unit cooling fan(FM16) 0004 digital unit cooling fan(FM14/15) YES: End NO: Check the wiring from the fan identified by the detail code to connector of the DC controller PCB; if normal, replace the DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.42 E822 Fan DC controller PCB 1) Try the fan identified by the detail code.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.44 E826 Pickup cooling fan(FM26/32) DC controller PCB 1) Try replacing pickup cooling fan(FM26/32). Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Check the wiring from the fan identified by the detail code to the connector on the deck controller PCB; if normal, replace the DC controller PCB. Fan Connector FM26 J5706 FM32 J2226A 4.1.45 AC power is absent. Power plug 1) Is the power plug connected to the power outlet? NO: Connect the power plug.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS System of checking the Leakage Breaker 1. Press the test button of the breaker. Test button 2. F05-401-14 Check to make sure that open/close lever has shifted to the OFF terminal side and the power has been cut. 3. 4. F05-401-15 Turn off the power switch. Shift the open/close lever to the ON side. 5. Turn on the power switch. F05-401-16 5-150 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Power switch (SW2) faulty Wiring 5) Connect the probes of the meter to both terminals of the power Ω when the switch is turned ON, and ∞Ω when switch (SW2). Is it 0Ω the switch is turned OFF? NO: Replace SW2. YES: Check the wiring of the AC power line and connector for poor contact. 4.1.46 DC power is absent.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.47 The scanner fails to move forward/in reverse. Cable (broken, displaced) 1) Is the drive cable routed correctly? NO: Re-route the cable. Obstacle in path 2) Is the rail free of dirt? Does the mirror mount move smoothly when pushed by hand? NO: Check the rail for dirt or foreign object; as necessary, clean or lubricate. REF.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.48 The scanning lamp fails to turn ON. Lamp 1) Turn OFF the power switch, and disconnect the power plug. Is the lamp installed properly? NO: Re-install the lamp. Thermal switch 2) Check both terminals of the thermal switch (TP4/5) for electrical continuity using the meter. Is there continuity? NO: Replace the thermal switch.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.49 The lifter fails to move up (pick-up from the cassette). Cassette 1) Slide out the cassette, and lift the holding plate inside the cassette. Does it move smoothly? NO: Check the inside of the cassette for foreign matter. Latch (cassette) 2) Is the movement of the latch assembly of the cassette grip normal? NO: Re-install it. Spring Lever 3) Push up the pick-up roller releasing lever by a finger.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.50 Pick-up fails (cassette 1). 1) Does the “ADD PAPER” message remain ON? YES: See “The ‘ADD PAPER’ message fails to turn OFF.” 2) Slide out and then in the cassette. Are the sounds of lifter lowering and of the lifter motor turning heard? NO: See “The lifter fails to rotate.” Drive belt (displacement) 3) Is the drive belt attached properly? NO: Re-attach it.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.51 Pick-up fails (cassette 2). 1) Does the “ADD PAPER” message remain ON? YES: See “The ‘ADD PAPER’ message fails to turn OFF.” 2) Slide out and then in the cassette. Are the sounds of the lifter lowering and of the lifter motor turning heard? NO: See “The lifter fails to move up.” Drive belt (displacement) 3) Is the belt for drive attached properly? NO: Re-attach the belt.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.52 The multifeeder fails to pick up paper. Multifeeder pick-up clutch (CL6) 1) Select multifeeder pick-up, and press the Start key. Does the multifeeder pick-up roller rotate? NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace CL6. Multifeeder pick-up roller 2) Is paper fed properly by the pick-up roller? YES: Replace the pick-up roller. Lifter plate 3) Press the Start key. Does the lifter plate move up? NO: Check the lifter plate drive system.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.54 Retention fails. C transfer blade 1) Is the C transfer blade locked in position properly? NO: Check the locking mechanism for the transfer blade. High-voltage cable 2) Is the connection of the high-voltage cable for C transfer charging proper? NO: Re-connect it. Transfer belt 3) Is there a scratch or a dent in the transfer belt? YES: Replace the belt. Paper 4) Is paper curled or wavy? YES: Replace the paper.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.55 The pre-exposure lamp fails to turn ON. Pre-exposure lamp (LA2) 1) Turn ON the power switch, and disconnect the connector J2239 Ω range, and from the DC controller PCB. Set the meter to the ×100Ω measure the resistance between the following terminals on the harΩ? ness side.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Thermistor (TH1, TH3) Ω range. Does the index of the meter swing 4) Set the meter to the ×1Ω when the probe of the meter is connected to the following connector of the fixing drawer connector (J6019)? J6019A12 and 13 J6019B-1 and 2 YES: Replace the thermistor.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.57 The drum heater fails to rotate. Drum heater (H3, H4, H5, H6) Ω range, and connect the probes of the 1) Set the meter to the ×100Ω meter to the terminals of the heater. Does the index of the meter swing? NO: Replace the drum heater. Thermistor (TH8,9,10,11) Ω range, and connect the probes of the 2) Set the meter to the ×1000Ω meter to the following terminals.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.58 The counter fails to operate. Counter 1) Turn OFF the power switch, and disconnect the connector J2216 Ω range, and meafrom the DC controller. Set the meter to the ×KΩ sure the resistance of the following counters: Counter + – CNT1 J2216B-9 J2216B-8 CNT2 J2216B-10 J2216B-8 CNT3 J2216B-11 J2216B-8 CNT4 J2216B-12 J2216B-8 CNT5 J2216B-13 J2216B-8 CNT6 J2216B-14 J2216B-8 NO: Check the wiring from J2216 to the counter; if normal, replace the counter.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.59 The cassette heater fails to operate. Environment sensor 1) Is there a significant discrepancy between the temperature/humidity indicated under ‘DISP > ANALOG’ in service mode and the readings of a thermometer/hygrometer in the room? NO: Replace the sensor. 2) Make the following sections in service mode: DISP > SENSOR. Is the following indication ‘1’? 802009 00100000 3rd bit NO: Go to step 4.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.60 Abnormal noise is heard. Scanner system 1) Is the noise from the scanning system? YES: Check the scanner motor, belt, cable, pulley, and rail. Check the mirror mount for an object that may come into contact. Drum motor drive system 2) Is the noise from the drum unit? YES: Check the drum motor drive system (drum motor, gear, photosensitive drum, flywheel). Fan 3) Is the noise from the fan? YES: Check the fan.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 5 Troubleshooting Feeding Problems 5.1 Jams The CLC1000 may be divided into the following blocks in terms of where copies tend to jam.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Use the CLC1000’s service mode (control display mode) to check the location and the type of jam.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 5.1.1 Pick-Up Assembly 1) Was the paper picked up from the cassette? NO: Go to step 11. Cassette 2) Is the cassette properly set in the cassette? NO: Set the cassette properly, and check the inside of the cassette for foreign matter. Paper 3) Is the paper curled or wavy? YES: Replace the paper, and advise the user on the correct method of storing paper. 4) Try paper recommended by Canon.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 11) Paper is fed through the multifeeder. Do the multifeeder pick-up roller and the paper thickness detecting roller rotate? NO: See “Multifeeder pick-up fails.” Paper 12) Try Canon-recommended paper. Is the problem corrected? YES: Advise the user to use recommended paper. Transparency 13) Is the transparency of the specified type, and is it oriented correctly? NO: Advise the user to use transparencies of the specified type and to place them correctly.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Registration roller 5): Is the registration roller deformed or worn? YES: Replace the registration roller. OHP sensor, Registration paper sensor, Post-registration paper sensor 6): Is the operation of each sensor (OHPS, PS1, PS14) of the pick-up feeding assembly normal? YES: Check each guide plate for foreign matter and deformation. NO: Check the lever and wiring; if normal, clean/replace the part. 5.1.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Separation sensor 3) Is the separation sensor (PS15) operating normally? NO: Check the lever and the wiring; if normal, replace the sensor. Feeding belt 4) Is the feeding belt operating normally? NO: Check the pre-fixing feeding motor. YES: Check the feeding belt; if wear or scraches are found, replace the belt. 5.1.5 Fixing/Delivery Assembly Separation claw 1) Is the separation claw soiled? YES: Clean it with solvent.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Delivery paper deflecting plate Oil applying assembly 11) Does the delivery paper deflecting plate operate normally? NO: Check the delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid (SL14). YES: 1. Check the oil applying roller drive assembly. 2. Check the level of the silicone oil. 5.1.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 5.1.7 Duplex feeding Assembly/Duplex Assembly Duplexing unit 1) Is the duplex feeding assembly properly installed in the copier? NO: Install it properly, and check the inside of the unit for foreign matter. Paper 2) Try Canon-recommended paper. Is the problem corrected? YES: Advise the user to use recommended paper. Feeding roller 3) Does the feeding roller operate normally? NO: Check the paper feed roller solenoid (SL13).
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 5.2 Feeding Faults 5.2.1 Double Feeding Separation roller Pressure spring 1) Is the separation roller deformed or worn? YES: Replace the separation roller. NO: Adjust the position of the pressure spring. Replace the pressure spring of the separation roller. 5.2.2 Wrinkles Cassette pick-up assembly Duplexing unit 1) Turn off the power while paper is moving through the pick-up vertical path assembly/pick-up feeding assembly.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6 Arrangement and Functions of Electrical Parts 6.1 Sensors PS5 PS4 PS3 PS2 PS25 PS24 PS1 PS23 PS41 PS22 PS21 PS26 PS27 PS37 PS31 PS39 PS36 PS30 PS40 PS38 PS34 PS33 PS8 PS28 PS42 PS29 PS9 PS12 PS35 PS6 PS18 PS32 PS20 PS15 PS13 PS14 PS17 PS19 PS11 PS10 F05-601-01 5-174 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Sensor PS 1 PS 2 PS 3 PS 4 PS 5 PS 6 PS 8 PS 9 PS 10 PS 11 PS 12 PS 13 PS 14 PS 15 PS 17 PS 18 PS 19 PS 20 PS 21 Notation Name Sensor Registration paper sensor Multifeeder lifter sensor (upper) Multifeeder lifter sensor (lower) Multifeeder paper width sensor (front) Multifeeder paper width sensor (rear) Fixing oil level sensor Pre-duplex tray feed sensor 1 Pre-duplex tray feed sensor 2 Transfer belt cleaning web rotation sensor Transfer belt cleaning w
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS [OHP SENSOR] PTS1 [OHP LED] [BD C] [BD Y] [BD M] [BD K] SVR1 TS3 SEU1 SEU2 TS1 TS2 TS4 SVR2 TS5 TS6 TS7 TS8 SALT C SALT M ATR C ATR M SALT Y SALT K ATR Y F05-601-02 Notation ATR C ATR M ATR Y BD C BD M BD Y BD K PTS 1 SALT C SALT M SALT Y SALT K Name ATR sensor (C) ATR sensor (M) ATR sensor (Y) BD sensor (C) BD sensor(M) BD sensor (Y) BD sensor (Bk) Paper thickness sensor SALT sensor (C) SALT sensor (M) SALT sensor (Y) SALT sensor (Bk) N
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS LF1 L1 COB2 COB1 CB1 RL1 T1 TR1 TR2 F05-601-03 Notation COB 1 COB 2 CB 1 L1 LF 1 Name Terminal base (large) Terminal base (small) Leakage breaker Noise filter 1 Noise filter 2 Notation RL 1 T1 TR 1 TR 2 Name Fixing relay Deck heater transformer Lower heater triac Upper heater triac T05-601-03 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.2 “Lamps, Switches, Thermistors, and Heaters” LA2 LA3 LA4 LA5 LED2 LA1 CNT4 CNT5 CNT6 CNT1 CNT2 CNT3 LED1 H3 H4 H5 H6 H9 H7 H1 H2 H8 F05-602-01 5-178 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Sensor LA1 LA2 LA3 LA4 LA5 LED1 LED2 CNT1 CNT2 CNT3 CNT4 Notation Name Sensor Scanning lamp Pre-scanning lamp (C) Pre-scanning lamp (M) Pre-scanning lamp (Y) Pre-scanning lamp (Bk) Image position correction LED (front) Image position correction LED (rear) Counter1 Counter2 Counter3 Counter4 CNT5 CNT6 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 Notation Name Counter5 Counter6 Fixing uppper heater Fixing lower heater Drum heater (C) Drum heater (M) Drum heater (Y) Drum
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS TH7 TH8 TH9 TH10 TH11 TP5 TP4 TP3 TH5 TH2 TH4 TH12 TH6 TP1 TH1 TH3 TP2 SW9 SW6 SW2 SW4 SW3 SW1 SW5 SW8 F05-602-02 5-180 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Sensor TH1 TH2 TH3 TH4 TH5 TH6 TH7 TH8 TH9 TH10 TH11 TH12 TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 Notation Name Sensor Fixing upper thermistor (main) Fixing upper thermsitor (sub) Fixing lower thermistor (main) Fixing lower thermistor (sub) Fixing oil thermsitor Fixing oil heater thermistor Scanner base thermistor Drum thermistor (C) Drum thermistor (M) Drum thermistor (Y) Drum thermistor (Bk) Environment sensor Fixing upper roller thermal switch Fixing lower roller therm
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.5 Fans FM15 FM16 FM14 FM5 FM13 FM31 FM4 FM12 FM1 FM2 FM3 FM34 FM27 FM19 FM20 FM7 FM28 FM29 FM30 FM33 FM37 FM38 FM24 FM6 FM8 FM32 FM26 FM9 FM18 FM17 FM36 FM35 FM23 FM22 FM21 F05-605-01 5-184 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Sensor FM1 FM2 FM3 FM4 FM5 FM6 FM7 FM8 FM9 FM12 FM13 FM14 FM15 FM16 FM17 FM18 FM19 FM20 Notation Name Sensor Delivery assembly exhaust fan 1 Delivery assembly exhaust fan 2 Delivery assembly exhaust fan 3 Laser cooling fan (front) Laser cooling fan (rear) Primary exhaust fan Rre-fixing feed fan Primary suction fan (left) Primary suction fan (right) Reader assembly cooling fan (front) Reader assembly cooling fan (rear) Digital unit cooling fan 1 Digital
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.6 Motors M2 M4 M3 M6 M29 M5 M37 M8 M7 M15 M13 M24C M24M M24Y M14 M24K M31 M16 M12 M22 M32 M11 M23 M17 M25 M30 M28 M1 M10 M35 M36 M18C M18M M38 M18Y M9 M39 M21 M19 M18K M20 F05-606-01 5-186 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Sensor M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18C M18M M18Y M18K Notation Name Sensor Multifeeder lifter motor Mirror slant correction motor (C) Mirror ratio correction motor (C) Laser scanner motor Mirror slant correction motor (Y) Mirror ratio correction motor (Y) Mirror slant correction motor (Bk) Mirror ratio correction motor (Bk) Fixing motor Multifeeder pickup motor Per-fixing feed motor Transfer belt cleaning web motor Trans
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.7 PCBs [27] [32] [13] [15] [37] [26] [24] [52] [33] [21] [78] [44] [80] [74] [18] [45] [79] [25] [46] [20] [47] [77] [78] [55] [19] [56] [75] [4] [1] [2] [36] [53] [6] [48] [57] [22] [49] [11] [79] [14] [16] [10] [59] [58] [23] [5] [60] [3] [77] [34] [76] [8] [9] [17] [7] [35] [12] [61] F05-607-01 5-188 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Sensor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 32 33 34 Notation Name Sensor AC drive PCB Ficker controller PCB DC power supply PCB 2 DC power supply PCB 1 Lamp regulator Multifeeder PCB HVT3-A Pickup motor drive PCB HVT3-B HVT2-R NVT2-L DC controller PCB ED board Interface controller motor PCB Reader controller PCB Original scanner motor PCB HVT4 Laser drive PCB (C) Laser drive PCB (Bk) Laser drive PCB (Y) Laser drive P
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB Of the variable resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), and check pins used in the CLC1000, those that are needed when servicing the machine in the field are discussed. 1 Do not touch the VRs and check pins that are not mentioned herein; they are for factory use only and require special instruments and high precision for adjustment.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8.2 Video Controller PCB 1 0 11 1 8 J2 10 J2113 35 1 J2107 35 1 J2106 35 1 35 1 J2112 1 J2103 7 1 B30 B29 A30 A29 J2102 J2115 50 49 100 6 99 B2 B1 A2 A1 7 J2114 J2105 1 6 2 1 52 51 J2104 1 3 1 5 9 J2 10 11 J2 5 13 5 J2101 13 1 J2 35 8 F05-608-02 5-192 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8.3 Reader Control PCB 52 51 2 1 A34 A33 B34 B33 A2 A1 B2 B1 B2 B1 A2 A1 J1314 J1303 B2 B1 A2 A1 J1313 J1308 A2 A1 B2 B1 100 99 50 49 J1302 A8 J1309 A1 A14 J1307 A1 A11 J1306 A1 J1304 4 B1 B10 B1 B9 B1 B14 B1 LED LED 1301 1302 J1301 1 1 6 B11 A40 A39 B40 B39 A10 J1310 A1 FLASH ROM B34 B33 A34 A33 B34 B33 A34 A33 LED1303 F05-608-03 LED LED1301: LED1302: LED1303: Function ON while all-night power supply 5 V is being supplied.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8.4 Image Processor PCB 240 239 120 119 240 122 239 121 120 2 119 1 J206 122 121 2 1 J205 LED2 LED1 J204 1 12 1 2 51 52 J203 49 50 99 100 1 2 41 42 J202 39 40 79 80 40 39 80 79 J201 2 1 42 41 F05-608-04 LED LED1: LED2: Function ON while +3.3 V power is being supplied. ON while +5 V power is being supplied. T05-608-02 5-194 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8.5 IP Memory PCB 42 100 41 99 2 50 1 49 80 79 40 39 J804 52 51 2 13 1 J803 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 101 102 J802 97 99 199 200 1 J801 J15 J13 J11 J9 144 2 143 1 144 2 143 1 144 2 143 1 144 2 143 1 J7 J5 J3 J1 144 143 144 143 144 143 144 143 F05-608-05 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS J2100 1 B2 B1 A2 A1 J2101 B24 B25 A24 A25 6.8.6 Analog Processor PCB 7 J2102 J2103 1 11 1 13 F05-608-06 6.8.7 Transfer Belt Motor Driver PCB 4 1 1 J3202 4 VR3201 J3201 J3203 5 1 F05-608-07 LED VR3201 : Function for factory adjustment (Do not touch.) T05-608-03 5-196 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8.8 Laser Driver PCB ■ For C/Bk VR3001 VR3003 VR3005 VR3007 VR3009 35 1 35 J3002 1 J3001 VR3002 VR3004 VR3006 VR3008 VR3010 F05-608-08 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS ■ For Y/M VR3009 VR3007 VR3005 VR3003 VR3001 25 1 1 VR3008 VR3006 VR3004 VR3002 J3001 25 J3002 VR3010 F05-608-09 VR Function VR3001: VR3002: VR3003: VR3004: VR3005: VR3006 : VR3007: VR3008: VR3009: VR3010: Use it to set the laser power minimum level (at time of replacing the laser unit). Use it to set the laser power maximum level (at time of replacing the laser unit).
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8.9 Lamp Regulator PCB VR1 1 J9 4 J4-2 8 1 J4-1 8 1 3 J10 1 VR2 F05-608-10 LED VR1: VR2: Function for factory adjustment (Do not touch.) T05-608-05 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8.10 Enviroment Sensor PCB 6 J1 1 VR1 VR2 J2 1 4 F05-608-11 LED VR1: VR2: Function for factory adjustment (Do not touch.) T05-608-06 5-200 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS J4101 J4102 1 8 2 1 6.8.11 HVT1 VR4101 I K C M Y F05-608-12 LED VR4101: Function for factory adjustment (Do not touch.) T05-608-07 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8.12 HVT2 ■ HVT2-1 J4603 J4605 1 J4601 4 1 AUX 2 P LED4602 LED4601 J4607 W4601-1 1 8 F05-608-13 LED LED4601: LED4602: Function ON while (Y) Pre-primary charging high voltage is being generated. (Y)/(C) ON in response to primary charging output. T05-608-08 5-202 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS ■ HVT2-2 1 8 W4601-2 LED4604 3 AUX LED4603 P 8 1 1 J4602 J4604 J4606 F05-608-14 LED LED4603: LED4604: Function ON while (Y) Pre-primary charging high voltage is being generated. ON while (Y) primary charging high voltage is being generated T05-608-09 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 7 7 1 W5101-2 J5103 VR5101 2 J5101 1 1 J5102 5 1 J5104 W5101-1 5 1 6.8.13 HVT4 F05-608-15 Function LED VR5101: for factory adjustment (Do not touch.) T05-608-10 6.8.14 HVT5 J5201 4 1 F05-608-16 5-204 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8.15 ED board A1 J1502 LED2 LED1 J1501 1 14 1 2 41 42 J1504 40 39 39 40 80 79 79 80 122 121 2 1 J1503 1 2 42 41 F05-608-17 LED LED1: LED2: Function ON while +3.3 V power is being supplied. ON while +5 V power is being supplied. T05-608-11 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8.16 Interface board B1 B2 B1 A2 A1 C32 B32 A32 J1801 C1 B1 A1 B54 B55 A54 A55 J1802 C32 B32 A32 J1806 C1 B1 A1 F05-608-18 5-206 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8.17 Preview monitor board 8 J3702 1 9 B2 B1 A2 A1 16 C32 B32 A32 J3703 J3704 B12 B13 A12 A13 27 26 2 1 49 50 24 25 J3701 C1 B1 A1 F05-608-19 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.11 Buffer pass unit C1 FM1 FM2 FM3 PS4 PS8 PS1 PS5 PS3 PS6 FM4 PS2 PS7 CB1 NF1 SL1 SL6 M2 M1 SL5 SL3 SL4 M3 SW1 F05-611-01 5-210 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Sensor Notation Name FM1 FM2 FM3 FM4 Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling fan fan fan fan 1 2 3 4 PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 PS5 PS6 PS7 PS8 Reversal timing sensor Reversal jam sensor Delivery sensor Upper phase sensor 1 Upper phase sensor 2 Lower phase sensor 1 Lower phase sensor 2 Inlet paper sensor Sensor Notation Name SL1 SL3 SL4 SL5 SL6 Flapper solenoid Downward curl removing solenoid 1 Downward curl removing solenoid 2 Upward curl removing solenoid 1 Upw
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 7 Upgrading (download) 7.1 Items to Prepare • • PC (to which the copier Service Support Tool has been installed) Bi-Centronics cable (w/ IEEE 1284Std-complaint notation) 7.2 Preparing for the Work 1) Turn on the power switch. 2) Record the settings of the user mode (if you are upgrading the reader controller PCB).
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 5) Slide the download switch on the download PCB to the LOAD position. DCON COPY LOAD RCON COPY LOAD Down load Connector Down load Connector (For DC Conntroller PCB) (For Reader Conntroller PCB) Down load Switch Down load Switch (For DC Conntroller PCB) (For Reader Conntroller PCB) F05-703-02 6) Turn on the PC, and start the Copier Service Support Tool. 7) Connect the power plug to the outlet, and turn on the power switch.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 7.4 Downloading 1) Select ‘main menu’ on the start-up message of the Copier Service Support Tool. 2) Select ‘next’ under ‘download/upload’. 3) Select the appropriate type and PCB, and press ‘start connection’. Type : CLC5000 PCB : RCON (reader controller PCB) DCN (DC controller PCB) 4) Operate as instructed on the PC screen to download the flash ROM program.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 7.5 After the Work 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the power plug. Disconnect the bi-Centronics cable. Slide the download switch to the COPY position. Connect the power plug, and turn on the power switch. ON the VERSION screen under ‘DISP’ in service mode, check the version of ‘R-CON’ or ‘DC-CON’. 6) Remove the cover switch actuator; then, secure the face cover, and close the front cover.
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Blank page 5-216 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
APPENDIX COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
APPENDIX 1 General Timing Chart Copy Start key ON STBY COPY CNTR LSTR STBY 1 sec Photosensitive drum motor (M21) Scanner motor (M29) Scanner home position sensor (PS37) Scanning lamp (LA1) Pre-exposure lamp (LA1/2/3/4) Primary charging assembly (high-voltage) Pre-primary charging assembly (high-voltage) Developing motor (C; M18C) Developing motor (M; M18M) Developing motor (Y; M18Y) Developing motor (Bk/ M18Bk) Developing bias (C; high-voltage) Developing bias (M; high-voltage) Developing bias (Y; hi
APPENDIX Power Switch ON 10 sec 1 sec Photosensitive drum motor (M21) Scanner motor (M29) Scanner home position sensor (PS37) Scanning lamp (LA1) Pre-exposure lamp (LA1/2/3/4) Primary charging assembly (high-voltage) Pre-primary charging assembly (high-voltage) Developing motor (C; M18C) Developing motor (M; M18M) Developing motor (Y; M18Y) Developing motor (Bk/ M18Bk) Developing bias (C; high-voltage) Developing bias (M; high-voltage) Developing bias (Y; high-voltage) Developing bias (Bk; high-voltage) A
2 General Circuit Diagram (1/3) B18 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J2229B GND RCPRDY* GND PSTS2* GND PCMD2* GND PSTS1* GND PCMD1* 1 2 3 4 J6406H 4 3 2 1 J6406B CNT2 Counter Counter Counter 6 4 2 Potential sensor (Bk) Potential sensor (Y) Potential sensor (M) Potential sensor (C) 1 2 3 4 J6358 J6350F M18Y Developing cylinder J6357KM (Y/M) J6215F 12 Reversing roller drive clutch J6356F Developing motor (Y) Waste toner lock sensor switch Separation corona assembly J6355M J6353M 28 J1513H M18C
Blank page A-4 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
J6422F 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 J6421F J6421M J6422M 2 General Circuit Diagram (2/3) J6408F 18Bk 18Bk 4 3 2 Fixing upper roller thermal switch 1 Fixing relay 18W 18Bk 3 1 J6365M J6340M 2 2 J6341F 1 2 J6344M 6 7 8 9 J5337 DC power supply PCB 2 1 J6412F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 J6412M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ET58 ET59 2 3 3 J51 5 Flicker controller PCB 18BK 18W 3 2 2 3 20W 3 4 1 1 18WBk 6 7 8 FT49 L1 Noise filter 1 18BK 18W 18W
A-6 1 2 3 J3004C Laser driver PCB (C) 1 2 3 J3004K Laser driver PCB (Bk) 1 2 3 J3103CF 1 2 3 J3103KF 1 2 3 J3103YF 1 2 3 J3103MF J3103CM 1 2 3 J3103KM 1 2 3 J3103YM 1 2 3 J3103MM 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 J3004Y J3004M Laser driver PCB (Y) Laser driver PCB (M) 3 3 3 J6307F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J6307M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 5 1 4 2 5 Image processor PCB 3 J204 6 7 8 6 9 10 7 J2852F Image position correction PCB (front) 11 12 1 2 3 13 14 4 1 5 2 ED board 6 3 J1507 4 7 J2
3 Paper Deck J1/K1 General Circuit Diagram Lifter sensor (lower) Pickup roller releasing solenoid M8001 SL8001 M SL Lifter upper limit switch Lifter sensor (upper) PS8001 SW8001 PS8002 Cover open/closed detecting switch Lifter lower limit switch SW8002 Deck sensor SW8003 CL 1 2 3 GND FT8006 FT8007 ET8002 1 2 3 4 J8012A 3 2 1 J8012B 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 GND J8012H +12V ET8001 Paper deck heater(1) 1 2 3 J8008H J8008B 1 2 3 1 2 3 J8014F 1 2 3 J8014M 1 2 3 ET8008 28 1 2 3
4 Buffer Pass Unit General Circuit Diagram Cover switch FT1 FT4 SW1 J5B J5H 3 2 1 J507H J508H J509A 1 2 3 J510A 1 2 3 J509B 3 2 1 J510B 3 2 1 J510H J509H J520 Cooling fan 4 FM4 3 2 1 J515 J553 1 2 3 4 5 6 J101 1 2 3 4 5 6 J102 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J103 +24V GND FAN4ER +24V GND FAN1ER +24V GND FAN2ER +24V GND FAN3ER 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 N.C.
APPENDIX 5 Special Tools You will need the following special tools in addition to the standard tools set to service the machine. No. Rank* Remarks 1 Laser power checker FY9-4013 Tool Name Tool No. Shape A Use it when adjusting the intensity of the laser from the laser unit; to be use in combination with a digital multimeter.
APPENDIX No. Tool Name Tool No. Rank* Remarks 6 Environment sensor checker TKN-0457 Shape B Use it when checking the environment PCB. 7 Potential sensor checker (terminal) TKN-0197 B Use it when making a zero-level check on the surface potential sensor. 8 CA-1 test sheet FY9-9030020 A Use it when adjusting or checking images.
APPENDIX No. Tool Name 12 Crane transport Kit Tool No. Shape Rank* Remarks C Use it when transferring main body using crane FG6-1585000 TA-300-03 REF. *Rank A: Must be kept by each service person. B: Must be kept by each group of about five service persona. C: Must be kept by each workshop. COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
APPENDIX 6 SOLVENTS AND OILS No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Item Use Ethyl alcohol Cleaning: (Ethanol) copyboard, glass, mirror, etc. Isopropyl alcohol (Isopropanol) MEK Removing toner or oil stains Heat-resistant Lubricating the grease drive mechanisms; e.g., fixing drive gear, fixing ass’y, etc. Lubricating Spring cluch oil Lubricating oil Lubricating oil Scanner rail Chemiccal formula, mixture ratio, etc.
Service Mode COPYRIGHT© 2001 CANON INC. 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CONTENTS Contents 1 Outline ................................................ S-1 1.1 Construction of Service Mode ... S-1 1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selection ....................... S-1 1.3 Ending Service Mode ................ S-1 1.4 RAM Backup ............................. S-2 1.5 Basic Operations ........................ S-4 2 Control Display Mode (DISPLAY) .... S-5 3 ADJUST (adjustment) ...................... S-39 4. FUNCTION (function/inspection) ... S-78 5 OPTION (options mode) ...........
CONTENTS Blank page ii COPYRIGHT© 2001 CANON INC. 2000 CANON C2050/2020, C2100/2100S REV.0 JAN.
SERVICE MODE 1 Outline 1.1 Construction of Service Mode The CLC5000’s service mode is divided into the following six: No. Notation Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 DISPLAY ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST COUNTER Control display mode Adjustment mode Function/inspection mode Options mode Test print mode Counter mode T00-100-01 DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST F00-101-01 1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections 1) Press the ‘*’ key on the control panel.
SERVICE MODE 1.4 RAM Backup F00-104-01 shows the label attached to the inside of the cover of the service document compartment found on the front left cover. Each machine is adjusted at the factory, and the adjustment values are recorded on the label. Be sure to record any new values on the label if you executed service mode and changed values after replacing a part. S-2 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
SERVICE MODE B A FUNC DC-CON TYP 447 62 429 41 516 51 889 804 798 803 819 818 818 181 194 157 687 746 756 318 514 515 515 513 599 600 599 499 132 133 137 111 -2 184 102 3199 2408 E UP-A4R UP-STMR LOW-A4R LOW-STMR MF-A4R MF-A6R MF-A4 SGNL-Y SGNL-M SGNL-C REF-Y REF-M REF-C SIGG-Y SIGG-M SIGG-C SGNL-S-Y SGNL-S-M SGNL-S-C SGNL-S-K REF-S-Y REF-S-M REF-S-C REF-S-K SGNL-D-Y SGNL-D-M SGNL-D-C SGNL-D-K SIGG-S-Y SIGG-S-M SIGG-S-C SIGG-S-K PT-OFST-K PUDT-U PUDT-L P-TH-1 P-TH-2 SNSR-RNK ADJUST PASCAL P-OFST-Y P-OF
SERVICE MODE 1.5 Basic Operations Selecting Items Items may be Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3. The Level 1 items remain on the screen throughout service mode. • To select an item, press the highlighted notation on the touch panel. • Display (e.g., ADJUST>ADJ-XY>MRK-MB) • Indicates the state of the reader unit. READY: Ready to accept a command for copying operation. BUSY: Executing service mode; not ready to accept a command for copying operation. Indicates the state of the printer unit.
SERVICE MODE 2 Control Display Mode (DISPLAY) DISP READY VERSION ACC-STS ANALOG ADJUST SHD/BOF SENSOR JAM/ERR FUNC RF-INF SORT-INF BLT-DRFT OPTION USER COUNTER DENS EPOT PRJ-INF TEST F00-200-01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 VERSION ACC-STS ANALOG DENS EPOT SHD/BOF SENSOR JAM/ERR PRJ-INF BLT-DRFT RF-INF SORT-INF USER Indicates the version of the ROM. Indicates the status of the option. Indicates the measurement taken by the analog sensor.
SERVICE MODE VERSION DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST R-CON DC-CON SCANNER ECO IPU SERIAL NO. CNT-MODE RF SORTER xx.xx xx.xx xx xx xx xx xx.xx xxxxxxxxxx xx xxxx.xx.xx. xxxx.xx.xx. F00-200-02 R-CON Indicates the version of the ROM on the reader controller PCB. DC-CON Remarks Indicates the version of the ROM on the DC controller PCB. XX.XX R&D control No. ROM version No.
SERVICE MODE RF Indicates the version of the ROM on the RDF controller PCB. (only if connected) SORTER Remarks Indicates the version of the ROM on the sorter controller PCB. (only if connected) XXXX.XX.XX R&D number ROM version Not used COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
SERVICE MODE ■ Details of CNT-MODE Display Counter 1 Counter 2 7 Total counter 5 Total counter 3 Total counter 4 Total copy counter Full color copy counter Full color copy counter (large size) Full color print + full color copy counter (large size) Full color copy counter (large size) Counter 1 Counter 4 Counter 2 Counter 5 Counter 3 Counter 6 S-8 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Retention counter Color print counter (large size) Bk print + Bk copy counter (large size) Bk print
SERVICE MODE ACC-STS DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST EDITOR PROJECTOR IPU/PS CCV DECK RF STS ED ASSIST CCX x x x x x x x x x x F00-200-03 EDITOR Indicates the state (connection) of the editor. EDITOR= 0: Editor absent. 1: Editor present. PROJECTOR Indicates the status (connection) of the projector.
SERVICE MODE RF Indicates connection of the RF. RF= 0: RF absent. 1: RF present. STS Indicates the status (connection) of the STS. STS= 0: STS absent. 1: STS present. ED Indicates the status (connection) of the ED board. ED= 0: ED absent. 1: ED present. ASSIST Indicates the status (connection) of the Copy data controller-A1/DA unit-A1. ASSIST= 0: Connection absent. 1: Connection present. CCX Indicates the status (connection) of the Card reader-A1. CCX= 0: Connection absent. 1: Connection present.
SERVICE MODE ANALOG DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST BODY BODY BODY FUSER-U FUSER-L EPOT-C EPOT-M EPOT-Y EPOT-K OPTICS 1/2 xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx ˚C % g ˚C ˚C V V V V ˚C xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx DRUM-T-C DRUM-T-M DRUM-T-Y DRUM-T-K WIDTH-MF WIDTH-1 WIDTH-2 xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx ˚C ˚C ˚C ˚C mm mm mm xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx F00-200-04 BODY(°C) Indicates the machine inside temperature measured
SERVICE MODE EPOT-Y/M/C/K Indicates the drum surface potential measured by the potential sensor. EPOT XXX V XXX Potential sensor output value (0 to 1023) Potential sensor output conversion value (V) OPTICS Indicates the temperature of the laser scanner assembly (thermistor TH7). DRUM-T/M/C/K Indicates the drum heater temperature (thermistor TH8/9/10/11).
SERVICE MODE ANALOG 2/2 READY OIL-TMP ºC XXX ADJUST OILH-TMP ºC XXX FUNC FIX-U-SB ºC XXX OPTION FIX-L-SB ºC XXX DISP COUNTER TONNER-K USER TEST F00-200-05 OIL-TMP Indicates the temperature of the fixing oil. (Output from the fixing oil thermistor TH5) OILT-TMP Indicates the temperature of the fixing oil heater. (Output from the fixing oil thermistor TH6) FIX-U-SB Indicates the temperature of the fixing upper roller end.
SERVICE MODE DENS DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC DENS-C xxxx SGNL-C xxxx REF--C xxxx 1/3 DENS-M xxxx SGNL-M xxxx REF--M xxxx DENS-Y xxxx SGNL-Y xxxx REF--Y xxxx OPTION TEST F00-200-06 DENS-C/M/Y Remarks Indicates the discrepancy of the density of the developer on the developing cylinder (each color) in reference to the target value in %. +: Darker than target value. –: Lighter than target value.
SERVICE MODE DENS DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC OPTION DENS-S-C xxxx SGNL-S-C xxxx REF-S-C xxxx SGNL-D-C xxxx 2/3 DENS-S-M xxxx SGNL-S-M xxxx REF-S-M xxxx SGNL-D-M xxxx DENS-S-Y xxxx SGNL-S-Y xxxx REF-S-Y xxxx SGNL-D-Y xxxx DENS-S-K xxxx SGNL-S-K xxxx REF-S-K xxxx SGNL-D-K xxxx TEST F00-200-07 DENS-S-C/M/Y/K Remarks Indicates the density of the pattern on the drum (each color) in reference to the target value. Normal if between -40 and +40.
SERVICE MODE DENS DISP COUNTER WINDOW-C xxxx 3/3 WINDOW-M xxxx WINDOW-Y xxxx WINDOW-K xxxx ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST F00-200-08 WINDOW Remarks S-16 Indicates the window soiling correction coefficient. The value decreases when the SALT sensor becomes soiled. Normal if between 60 and 140. COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
SERVICE MODE EPOT DISP COUNTER V00-C FUNC OPTION xxx xxx xxx V00-K V00-Y V00-M xxx ADJUST VFF-C VFF-M VFF-Y VFF-K xxxxx VDC-C xxx VG-C xxxxx xxxxx VDC-M xxx VG-M xxxxx xxxxx VDC-Y xxx VG-Y xxxxx xxxxx VDC-K xxx VG-K xxxxx TEST F00-200-09 VOO-C/M/Y/K Remarks Indicates the target value for VD (with laser output at 00). Indicates the optimum value computed by potential control.
SERVICE MODE SHD/BOF DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC BAR-CODE xxxxxxxxxxxx READY BOARD-B xxx TARGET-B xxx BOF-B xx xx READY BOARD-G xxx TARGET-G xxx BOF-G xx xx BOARD-R xxx TARGET-R xxx BOF-R xx xx OPTION TEST F00-200-10 BAR-CODE Remarks Indicates the bar code value of the standard white plate. The value is indicated only after executing ‘FUNC > CCD > AUTO > ADJ’. (Thereafter, the value will not be indicated at power on/off.
SERVICE MODE SENSOR DISP ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST COUNTER 800000H 800001H 800002H 800003H 800004H 800005H xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx 80000DH xxxxxxxx 80000EH xxxxxxxx 80000FH xxxxxxxx READY 801000H 801001H 801002H 801003H 801004H 801005H READY xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx 802000H 802001H 802002H 802003H 802004H 802005H xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx F00-
SERVICE MODE Address 800000 800001 800002 800003 800004 S-20 Connector Description Remarks 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 SW2 – TH6 FM35,36 H1,2 H3,4,5,6 TH1,2,3,4 TH8,9,10,11 – power switch AC input fixing oil/oil heater thermistor error detection pre-fixing exhaust fan error detection fixing heater power error detection drum heater power error detection fixing thermistor error detection drum thermistor error detection counter error detection ON:1 OFF:0 AC input present: 0 ready: 0; error: 1 ready: 0; erro
SERVICE MODE Address 800005 800006 800007 800008 800009 Connector 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 – – – – PS22 – FM6 FM7 PS1 PS21 PS25 PS26 OHP sensor FM32 FM31 FM20,27 PS14 PS15 PS35 PS34 PS32 PS33 PS8 PS9 PS30 – FM34 PS34 TH1,2 TH3,4 TP1 TP2 SEU1 1 SVR1 2 SEU2 3 SVR2 4 5 6 7 M16 M17 M8001 M1 Description Remarks fixing unit connection detention fixing assembly knob connection detection holding tray unit connection detection transfer unit connection detect
SERVICE MODE Address Connector 80000A 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PS24 PS27 PS2 PS3 SW8002 SW8002 PS29 M31 80000B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 PS4 PS5 SW6 PS8003 PS23 PS28 SW8001 PS31 – – – – – – – – TS1,5 TS2,6 TS3,7 TS4,8 FM34 FM20 FM32 FM33 PS11 SW4 PS6 PS36 M12 5 6 7 FM37 FM21,22,23 SW9 80000C 80000D 80000E S-22 Description cassette 1 lifter sensor cassette 2 lifter sensor multifeeder lifter sensor (upper) multifeeder lifter sensor (lower) paper deck lifter upper limit de
SERVICE MODE Address Connector 80000F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PS12 PS13 PS17 PS18 PS19 PS20 – PS10 800010 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M35 M13 M23 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – TH12 – – 800011 802000 802001 Description Remarks transfer belt lifter sensor 1 transfer belt lifter sensor 2 transfer belt front end sensor 1 transfer belt rear end sensor 2 transfer belt front end sensor 3 transfer belt rear end sensor 4 not used transfer belt cleaning
SERVICE MODE Address 802002 802003 802004 802005 802006 S-24 Connector 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M9 M9 – M10 M21 M29 M14 M20 M18 C M18 M M18 Y M18 K LA2 LA3 LA4 LA5 FM7 – M15 M15 CL17 M12 SL18 M31 SL7 C SL7 C SL7 M SL7 M SL7 Y SL7 Y SL7 K SL7 K M24 C M24 C M24 M M24 M M24 Y M24 Y M24 K M24 K Description fixing motor ON fixing motor speed switch not used multifeeder pickup motor ON photosensitive drum motor ON scanner motor ON transfer belt motor
SERVICE MODE Address 802007 802008 802009 80200A 80200B Connector 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Remarks CL1 CL2 CL3 CL4 CL5 – M32 M32 SL3 SL4 M30 SL2 SL15 M22 M22 M4 toner supply clutch (C) ON:1 toner supply clutch (M) ON:1 toner supply clutch (Y) ON:1 toner supply clutch (Bk) upper ON:1 toner supply clutch (Bk) lower ON:1 hopper sensor select ON:1 separation wire cleaner motor ON:1 separation wire cleaner motor ON:1 fixing take-up sole
SERVICE MODE Address 80200C 80200D 80200E 80200F 802010 S-26 Connector 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SL9 SL10 SL5 SL8001 SL8 SL13 FM24 FM26 CL12 CL14 CL7 CL6 CL8002 – CL10 FM28,29,30 SL16 OHP sensor PTS1 FM17,18 FM31 FM32 FM20,C27 – M16 M17 M1 M1 M8001 M8001 M21,22,23 M21,22,23 0 FM34 1 FM34 2 3 4 5 6 7 CL16 M19 SL14 SL11 L SL11 M SL11 S Description Remarks cassette 1 pickup roller releasing solenoid ON UP:1 cassette 2 pickup roller releasing solenoid ON UP
SERVICE MODE Address 802011 804000 804002 804004 804006 Connector 0 M2 1 M3 2 M5 3 M6 4 M7 5 M8 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PS39 PS40 CNT1 CNT2 CNT3 CNT4 CNT5 CNT6 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Description image position correction mirror slant correction motor (Y) image correction mirror ratio correction motor (Y) image position correction mirror slat correction motor (C) image position correction mirror ratio correction moto
SERVICE MODE Address 804008 80400A 80400C 80400E 804010 S-28 Connector 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Description for factory adjustment for factory adjustment for factory adjustment for factory adjustment for factory adjustment for factory adjustment for factory adjustment for factory adjustment for factory adjustment for factory adjustment for factory adjustment for fac
SERVICE MODE The 1st through 4th screens show the most recent 40 jams (location and type). The 5th and 6th screens provide histories of errors.
SERVICE MODE Table A Jam Location 0 Body 1 2 RDF Sorter Table B Jam Code (high-order 2 digits) 00 01 02 10 11 Jam at accessory Delay jam Stationary jam Jam at power-on or when the front cover, pick-up cover, or delivery cover is opened/closed. Jam when the front cover, pick-up assembly cover, or delivery cover is opened/closed during copying operation.
SERVICE MODE JAM/ERR DISP COUNTER 3/4 READY READY ERROR ADJUST Exxx FUNC Exxx Exxx Exxx Exxx Exxx Exxx Exxx Exxx Exxx OPTION TEST ERA-CLR ■ 5th/6th Screen (E code) F00-200-13 Indicates the appropriate error code (E) for the results of self diagnosis. Indicates detail codes for each error code. (See the descriptions on self diagnosis.
SERVICE MODE PRJ-INF DISP COUNTER CHANGER TRAY 0 ADJUST READY T-MOVE T-KIND 0 FUNC T-HP-ERR 0 L-MOVE M-EXCT LAMP-ERR 0 0 T-L-MOVE 0 0 OPTION T-SET 0 0 T-M-ERR READY T-POS 0 0 L-POS 0 INITIAL 0 LOCAL 0 R/L 0 0 TEST F00-200-14 CHANGER State Indicates the presence/absence of a rotary changer. 1: Present TRAY State Indicates the presence/absence of a slide tray. 1: Present T-KIND State Indicates the type of tray.
SERVICE MODE T-POS State Indicates the position of the tray. 0: Home position 1: Increases by 1 L-MOVE State Indicates that the lens is moving. 1: Moving M-EXCT State Indicates the state of motor excitation. 1: Excited L-POS State Indicates the position of the lens. 0: Home position LAMP-ERR State Indicates an open circuit in the lamp. 1: Open circuit INITIAL State Indicates that initialization is under way. 1: Processing LOCAL State Indicates local movement.
SERVICE MODE RF-INF DISP COUNTER ADJUST READY STATUS-1 xx STATUS-2 xx STATUS-3 xx STATUS-4 xx DOC-1 DOC-2 DOC-3 DOC-4 xx xx ERROR FUNC READY xx USER xx JAM xx xx OPTION TEST F00-200-15 STATUS-1/2/3/4 For R&D DOC-1/2/3/4 For R&D ERROR Indicates the error code sent by the RDF controller PCB.
SERVICE MODE SORT-INF DISP COUNTER ADJUST STATUS-1 xx STATUS-2 xx ERROR JAM xxxx ALARM-1 FUNC READY STATUS-3 xx STATUS-4 xx ALARM-3 ALARM-4 USER xx ALARM-2 xx READY xx xx xx OPTION TEST F00-200-16 STATUS-1/2/3/4 For R&D ERROR For R&D JAM Indicates the jam code sent by the sorter controller PCB.
SERVICE MODE BLT-DRFT DISP COUNTER ADJUST DIR B -- > F FST BELT -- POS CENTER XXXX XXXX XXXX F TO B C. Time XXXX XXXX FUNC F TO B XXXX XXXX XXXX B TO F C. Time XXXX XXXX OPTION BST XXXX XXXX XXXX TOTAL XXXX XXXX TEST B TO F XXXX XXXX XXXX F00-200-17 DIR State Indicates the present swing condition (direction) of the transfer belt.
SERVICE MODE BST State Indicates the time required by the transfer belt between when it reaches the transfer belt edge sensor 1 (PS18, rear) and when it leaves the sensor. BST XXXX XXXX XXXX Most recent data Second most recent data Third most recent data Unit: 0.1 sec B TO F State Indicates the time required by the transfer belt between when it reaches the transfer belt edge sensor 2 (PS18, rear) and when it reaches the end sensor 1 (PS17, front).
SERVICE MODE LANGUAGE Language used/destination of shipment. example: XX: country YY: language ZZ: 00=CANON, 01=others aa : 00:AB series, 01=Inch series, 02=A series, 03=all sizes S-38 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
SERVICE MODE 3 ADJUST (adjustment) DISP COUNTER ADJ-XY DOC-REC PROJ ED/RF ADJUST V-CONT COL-ADJ PASCAL ADJ-MISC FUNC FEED-ADJ REG-OFS OPTION TEST EC-ADJ ENV-SET HV-TR-C HV-TR-M HV-TR-Y HV-TR-K HV-SP HV-FS HV-EL DTMP-ADJ F00-300-01 1 ADJ-XY Adjusts the image read start position. 2 DOC-REC Adjusts the original detection area/slide level. 3 PROJ Adjusts the projector area. (only if the projector connected) 4 ED/RF Adjusts the editor.
SERVICE MODE ADJ-XY DISP COUNTER READY READY ADJ-X xxxx ADJUST ADJ-Y FUNC ADJ-S OPTION ADJ-J xxxx xxxx xxxx TEST F00-300-02 ADJ-X *1 Use it to make adjustments so that the image read start position (X direction, sub scanning direction) matches the reference point on the copyboard glass. Fine-adjusts the distance from the original scanner home position sensor to the read start position.
SERVICE MODE ADJ-S *1 Use it to fine-adjust the point at which the standard white plate is measured for shading correction data. • Unit: Number of steps of the stepping motor. • Scratches or dirt, if any, on the standard white plate can cause conspicuous vertical white lines on copies. If such is noted, shift the point of measurement using ‘ADJ-S’. + (forward) Point of measurement Standard white plate F00-300-03 Settings range 0~45 (0~4.8mm) Unit: 0.11mm (approx.
SERVICE MODE ■ Adjusting the Image Read Start Position You must check the point of retention (‘FUNC → ATTRACT’) before making the following adjustments: 1) Before starting service mode, turn OFF the original detection mechanism. 2) Select the screen, and press the Start key. • The appropriate copying modes will be set automatically, and a copy will be made with a shift of about 20 mm as shown in following. 3) If any part of the image is missing, decrease the values of ‘ADJ-X’ and ‘ADJ-Y’.
SERVICE MODE DOC-REC DISP COUNTER DA-XE DA-XS DS-DOC xx xx DS-OHP DS-PRJ xx READY DA-YE DA-YS xx xx ADJUST READY xx xx FUNC OPTION TEST F00-300-05 DA-XS *1 DA-XE DA-YS DA-YE Fine-adjusts the original detection area. The original must be placed correctly on the copyboard glass in original detection mode; if placed at an angle, the copies will have a black frame.
SERVICE MODE DS-DOC *1 DS-PRJ DS-OHP Adjusts the slice level for original detection. You may enter any value as the slice level for original detection. A higher value increases detection capability but tends to lead to wrong detection. DS-DOC:When detecting ordinary originals, DS-PRJ:When detecting the projection area with the projector in use, DS-OHP:When detecting film (6x6, 8x10) placed on the copyboard glass with the projector in use from the position of the reference sheet.
SERVICE MODE PROJ DISP ADJUST FUNC COUNTER PJRD-XS xxxx PJDA-XS xxxx PJCAR-X xxxx READY PJRD-XE xxxx PJDA-XE xxxx PJCAR-Y xxxx PJRD-YS xxxx PJDA-YS xxxx READY PJRD-YE xxxx PJDA-YE xxxx OPTION TEST F00-300-07 PJRD-XS/-XE/-YS/-YE Fine-adjusts the read area if original detection mechanism is off with the projector in use or if original detection fails when the original detection mechanism is on.
SERVICE MODE PJDA-XS/-XE/-YS/-YE Fine-adjusts the area from which measurements are taken for original detection when the original detection mechanism is on with the projector in use. • Use it also for the read area when the original detection mechanism is off in copyboard mode. • The area for the standard value (0) is 5 mm inside the Fresnel lens. Settings range –99~+99 YS, YE (–6.3~+6.3mm) Unit: 0.06mm (approx.) XS, XE (–10.9~+10.9mm) Unit: 0.11mm (approx.
SERVICE MODE ED/RF DISP COUNTER 1/2 READY ED-MODE x ADJUST EDADJ-X xxx xxx xxx xxx mm xxx mm EDADJ-Y xxx xxx xxx xxx mm xxx mm FUNC OPTION TEST READY LOOP-MB xxx LOOP-TH xxx F00-300-09 ED-MODE *1 Settings Switches editor operation mode.
SERVICE MODE LOOP-MB *1 Changes the processing method used to read images into memory for coloring in area specification/color creation. If the value is increased, filling gaps will be easier; too high a value, however, will result in bleeding. Settings range 0~3 (Standard: 0) LOOP-TH *1 If the slice level adjustment value is increased for binarization used for reading images into memory for area specification/color creation, finer lines may be read.
SERVICE MODE ED/RF DISP COUNTER 2/2 RFADJ-RX ADJUST RFADJ-RY FUNC RFADJ-DX OPTION RFADJ-DY x x.x mm x x.x mm x x.x mm x x.x mm TEST F00-300-11 RFADJ-RX RFADJ-RY RFADJ-DX RFADJ-DY Adjusts registration (with RF in use). Corrects registration when originals are picked up from the RF. Corrects in relation to main scanning direction →CCD read start position. Corrects in relation to sub scanning direction →original read start timing.
SERVICE MODE Settings range 0~99 Unit:RX, DX=0.11mm (approx.) RY, DY=0.06mm (approx.) (Standard: RX, DX=0 RY, DY=0) remarks For this mode, you must have finished: 1. Adjusting the original stop position and 2. Adjusting the horizontal registration. Note 1: You must enter the appropriate value whenever you have replaced a PCB or initialized a RAM; record any new values on the service label for this purpose.
SERVICE MODE COL-ADJ DISP COUNTER ADJ-M ADJ-Y x ADJUST ADJ-C OFST-M OFST-Y READY OFST-C x OFST-K x x ADJ-K x x x FUNC READY x MASK-M x OPTION TEST P-TBL-M P-TBL-Y x P-TBL-C x P-TBL-K x x F00-300-14 ADJ-C/M/Y/K *1 Corrects user color balance adjustment. • Be sure to set the setting for user color balance adjustment to 0 before using this mode. • Follow the image adjustment basic procedure.
SERVICE MODE P-TBL-C/M/Y/K Use it to make fine adjustments so that the hues will be closer to the hues of offset printing. After comparing M/C/Y/K outputs against professionally (offset) printed material, if the print-out is lighter, increase the setting of ‘P-TBL-M/C/Y/K’. If the print-out is darker, decrease the setting of ‘P-TBL-M/C/Y/K’. Settings range –3 ~ + 3 (Standard: 0) See the descriptions under ‘OPTION > R-OPT > MANAGE’.
SERVICE MODE PASCAL DISP COUNTER PASCAL 1 ADJUST FUNC OPTION 1/2 C-DMAX xxxx C-VRATE xxxx DMXCT-C 1 LUTCT-C 1 M-DMAX xxxx M-VRATE xxxx DMXCT-M 1 LUTCT-M 1 Y-DMAX xxxx Y-VRATE xxxx DMXCT-Y 1 LUTCT-Y 1 K-DMAX xxxx K-VRATE xxxx LUTCT-K 1 TEST PASCAL DISP COUNTER P-OFST-C 2/2 P-OFST-M 0 P-OFST-Y 0 P-OFST-K 0 0 ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST F00-300-15 PASCAL Determines whether to use or not data on gradatio
SERVICE MODE LUTCT-C/M/Y/K Settings Use it to specify whether to use the gradation correction control data of each color (auto gradation correction control). 0: Do not use. 1: Use. Standard value: 1 P-OFST-C/M/Y/K Use it to set data for correction of the target value for high-density areas in auto gradation correction mode (i.e., to correct variation of CCD readings).
SERVICE MODE ADJ-MISC DISP COUNTER READY READY VCONT 0 ADJUST SEG-ADJ BC-ADJ 0 FUNC K-DOFST 0 ACS-ADJ x 0 OPTION TEST F00-300-16 VCONT Settings Remarks Switches between auto and manual for target contrast potential (VG, VDC). 0: Auto (set by auto gradation correction control) 1~8: Manual C Vcount M Vcount Y Vcount K Vcount 1 370.00 365.000 390.00 420.00 2 370.00 365.00 390.00 420.00 3 370.00 365.00 390.00 420.00 4 355.00 345.00 370.00 410.00 5 335.00 325.
SERVICE MODE BC-ADJ Use it to adjust the color space area identified as black text in black text processing. Settings range -3 ~ +3 (standard: 0) A higher setting will increase the color space area within which an original is identified as being a black text original. ACS-ADJ Use it to adjust the color space area identified as chromatic in ACS evaluation. Use it to make adjustments if a black-and-white copy is made as the result of ACS evaluation when copying an obviously chromatic original.
SERVICE MODE FEED-ADJ DISP COUNTER UP-ADJ LOW-ADJ 0 ADJUST REFE-ADJ FUNC VSYC-ADJ READY MULT-ADJ 0 READY DECK-ADJ 0 0 0 0 OPTION TEST 1REG-LP 0 F00-300-17 UP-ADJ Adjusts the image write start position in main scanning direction when pick-up is from the upper cassette. Be sure to select the upper cassette on the User screen in advance. Settings range 0 ~ 255 (standard: 128) A higher value leads to a movement to the rear.
SERVICE MODE MULT-ADJ Adjusts the image write position in main scanning direction when pick-up is from the multifeeder. Be sure to select the upper cassette on the User screen in advance. Rear Settings range 0 ~ 255 (standard: 128) A higher value leads to a movement to the rear. Image (unit: about 0.06mm) Feeding direction Front F00-300-20 DECK-ADJ (only if deck is connected) Adjusts the image write start position in main scanning direction when pick-up is from the paper deck.
SERVICE MODE 1REG-LP Use it to adjust the degree of arching copy paper at the rear of the registration roller (paper stop timing). • A higher setting will increase the arching. • Too low a setting can cause skew movement. Settings range -6 ~ +6 (standard: 0) EC-R/G/B Enter the transmission rate correction value of EC coat glass; then, enter the OK key to set the input data. Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the EC coat glass.
SERVICE MODE heater ENV-SET DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC OPTION BODY BODY BODY 27 ˚C 28 % 624 g READY ENV-A ENV-B > ENV-C ENV-D ENV-E ENV-F ENV-G OFF READY 0g 290g 580g 1050g 1500g 1800g 2160g to to to to to to to USER 290g 580g 1050g 1500g 1800g 2160g OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON TEST F00-300-24 BODY °C Remarks Indicates the machine internal temperature measured by the environment sensor.
SERVICE MODE HV-TR-Y DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC BODY BODY BODY 1/4 xxx xxx xxx READY ˚C % g ZONE A ZONE B ZONE C READY 0.0g to 580g see 580g to 1800g see 1800g to -----g see 2/4 3/4 4/4 TR-OFS-Y xxxx OPTION TEST F00-300-25 BODY °C Remarks Indicates the machine internal temperature measured by the environment sensor.
SERVICE MODE HV-TR-Y 2/4 ADJUST BODY BODY BODY FUNC <<<<<<< ZONE A >>>>>>> TR-UT1 OPTION TR-N1 TR-UT2 TEST TR-N2 DISP COUNTER ˚C % g xxx xxx xxx TR-T1 xxxx TR-T2 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx TR-OHP xxxx TR-# xxxx xxxx TR-S1-1 xxxx TR-S1-2 xxxx TR-S2-1 xxxx TR-S2-2 xxxx TR-S3-1 xxxx TR-S3-2 xxxx F00-300-26 BODY °C Remarks Indicates the machine internal temperature measured by the environment sensor.
SERVICE MODE TR-# Effective during image position correction control. Settings range –5 ~ +5 (Standard: 0) Unit: 1.0 µA TR-T1 Effective in thick paper mode and, in addition, copying on a one-sided copy or on the 1st side of a two-sided copy. Settings range –5 ~ +5 (Standard: 0) Unit: 1.0 µA TR-T2 Effective in thick paper mode and, in addition, copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Settings range –5 ~ +5 (Standard: 0) Unit: 1.
SERVICE MODE TR-S2-2 Effective in special paper 2 mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Settings range –5 ~ +5 (Standard: 0) Unit: 1.0 µA TR-S3-1 Effective in special paper 3 mode and, in addition, when copying on a onesided copy or on the 1st side of a two-sided copy. Settings range –5 ~ +5 (Standard: 0) Unit: 1.0 µA TR-S3-2 In special paper 3 mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Settings range –5 ~ +5 (Standard: 0) Unit: 1.
SERVICE MODE HV-SP DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC BODY BODY BODY 1/4 xxx xxx xxx READY ˚C % g ZONE A ZONE B ZONE C READY 0.0g to 580g see 580g to 1800g see 1800g to -----g see 2/4 3/4 4/4 SP-OFST xxxx OPTION TEST F00-300-27 BODY °C Remarks Indicates the machine internal temperature measured by the environment sensor.
SERVICE MODE HV-SP 2/4 ADJUST BODY BODY BODY FUNC <<<<<<< ZONE A >>>>>>> SP-UT1 OPTION SP-N1 SP-UT2 TEST SP-N2 DISP COUNTER xxx ˚C xxx % xxx g SP-T1 xxxx SP-T2 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx SP-OHP xxxx SP-# xxxx xxxx SP-S1-1 xxxx SP-S1-2 xxxx SP-S2-1 xxxx SP-S2-2 xxxx SP-S3-1 xxxx SP-S3-2 xxxx F00-300-28 BODY °C Remarks Indicates the machine internal temperature measured by the environment sensor.
SERVICE MODE SP-OHP Effective in OHP mode. Settings range –5 ~ +5 (Standard: 0) Unit: 25 µA SP-# Effective during image position correction control. Settings range –5 ~ +5 (Standard: 0) Unit: 25 µA SP-T1 Effective in thick paper mode and, in addition, copying on a one-sided copy or on the 1st side of a two-sided copy. Settings range –5 ~ +5 (Standard: 0) Unit: 25 µA SP-T2 Effective in thick paper mode and, in addition, copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy.
SERVICE MODE SP-S2-1 Effective in special paper 2 mode and, in addition, when copying on a onesided copy. Settings range –5 ~ +5 (Standard: 0) Unit: 25 µA SP-S2-2 Effective in special paper 2 mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Settings range –5 ~ +5 (Standard: 0) Unit: 25 µA SP-S3-1 Effective in special paper 3 mode and, in addition, when copying on a onesided copy or on the 1st side of a two-sided copy.
SERVICE MODE HV-FS DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC BODY BODY BODY 1/4 xxx xxx xxx READY ˚C % g ZONE A ZONE B ZONE C READY 0.0g to 580g see 580g to 1800g see 1800g to -----g see 2/4 3/4 4/4 FS-OFST xxxx OPTION TEST F00-300-29 BODY °C Remarks Indicates the machine internal temperature measured by the environment sensor.
SERVICE MODE REF. Note 1: S-70 If stray toner occurs for STMT size images before fixing, increase the setting (so that the high-voltage output will increase) to limit the problem. However, keep in mind that too high a setting will cause the paper to stick to the guide before fixing, turning into a jam. The setting of this item will return to the default value when the PCB is replaced or the RAM is cleared, requiring input once again. Be sure to record any new setting you have made on the service label.
SERVICE MODE HV-FS 2/4 ADJUST BODY BODY BODY FUNC <<<<<<< ZONE A >>>>>>> FS-UT1 OPTION FS-N1 FS-UT2 TEST FS-N2 DISP COUNTER xxx xxx xxx ˚C % g FS-T1 xxxx FS-T2 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx FS-OHP xxxx FS-# xxxx xxxx FS-S1-1 xxxx FS-S1-2 xxxx FS-S2-1 xxxx FS-S2-2 xxxx FS-S3-1 xxxx FS-S3-2 xxxx F00-300-30 BODY °C Remarks Indicates the machine internal temperature measured by the environment sensor.
SERVICE MODE FS-# Effective during image position correction control. Settings range –5 ~ +5 (Standard: 0) Unit: 25 µA FS-T1 Effective in thick paper mode and, in addition, copying on a one-sided copy or on the 1st side of a two-sided copy. Settings range –5 ~ +5 (Standard: 0) Unit: 25 µA FS-T2 Effective in thick paper mode and, in addition, copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy.
SERVICE MODE FS-S2-1 Effective in special paper 2 mode and, in addition, when copying on a onesided copy. Settings range –5 ~ +5 (Standard: 0) Unit: 25 µA FS-S2-2 Effective in special paper 2 mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Settings range –5 ~ +5 (Standard: 0) Unit: 25 µA FS-S3-1 Effective in special paper 3 mode and, in addition, when copying on a onesided copy or on the 1st side of a two-sided copy.
SERVICE MODE HV-EL DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC BODY BODY BODY 1/4 xxx xxx xxx READY ˚C % g ZONE A ZONE B ZONE C READY 0.0g to 580g see 580g to 1800g see 1800g to -----g see 2/4 3/4 4/4 EL-OFST xxxx OPTION TEST F00-300-31 BODY °C Remarks Indicates the machine internal temperature measured by the environment sensor.
SERVICE MODE HV-EL 2/4 ADJUST BODY BODY BODY FUNC <<<<<<< ZONE A >>>>>>> EL-UT1 OPTION EL-N1 EL-UT2 TEST EL-N2 DISP COUNTER xxx xxx xxx ˚C % g EL-T1 EL-S1-2 xxxx EL-T2 xxxx EL-S2-1 xxxx xxxx EL-S2-2 xxxx xxxx xxxx EL-OHP xxxx EL-# xxxx xxxx EL-S3-1 xxxx EL-S1-1 xxxx EL-S3-2 xxxx xxxx F00-300-32 BODY °C Remarks Indicates the machine internal temperature measured by the environment sensor.
SERVICE MODE EL-# Effective during image position correction control. Settings range –5 ~ +1 (Standard: -2) Unit: 0.5 kV EL-T1 Effective in thick paper mode and, in addition, copying on a one-sided copy or on the 1st side of a two-sided copy. Settings range –5 ~ +1 (Standard: -2) Unit: 0.5 kV EL-T2 Effective in thick paper mode and, in addition, copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Settings range –5 ~ +1 (Standard: -2) Unit: 0.
SERVICE MODE EL-S2-2 Effective in special paper 2 mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Settings range –5 ~ +1 (Standard: -2) Unit: 0.5 kV EL-S3-1 Effective in special paper 3 mode and, in addition, when copying on a onesided copy or on the 1st side of a two-sided copy. Settings range –5 ~ +1 (Standard: -2) Unit: 0.5 kV EL-S3-2 In special paper 3 mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Settings range –5 ~ +1 (Standard: -2) Unit: 0.
SERVICE MODE 4.
SERVICE MODE INSTALL DISP COUNTER INIT-C 1/4 SINIT-C FUNC STIR-C OPTION SPLY-C TEST WINCLR-C SINIT-Y 0 SPLY-Y 0 WINCLR-M WINCLR-Y DISP COUNTER IMG-REG 2/4 LSNS-KIL ADJUST 0 REG-APER FUNC RECV-C 0 STIR-4 0 0 SPLY-K 0 WINCLR-K 0 WINCLR-4 0 BODY 0 505g NLSET-K 0 RECV-Y RECV-M 0 0 0 0 0 SINIT-4 STIR-K 0 0 SPLY-M 0 INSTALL SINIT-K STIR-Y 0 INIT-7 0 0 0 STIR-M INIT-3 0 0 SINIT-M 0
SERVICE MODE SINIT-C/M/Y/K Reads the initial value of the SALT signal (SGNL, REF) of the specified color. • The value will be indicated on screen 4/4. Record it to the service label. SINIT-4 Reads the initial value of the SALT signal (SGNL, REF) of four colors (C, M, Y, K) in sequence. • The value will be indicated on screen 4/4. Record it to the service label. STIR-C/M/Y/K Stirs the starter of the specified color. STIR-4 Stirs the starters of the four colors.
SERVICE MODE NLSET-K Use it to suppress fogging of Bk, if noted in a low-humidity environment, as follows: 1. In the environment in question, check to make sure that the moisture content is 5 g (indicated as ‘500 g’ on the screen) or less. 2. Replace the Bk developer. (See the descriptions of ‘replacing the developer’ in chapter 2. CLC1000 Service Handbook however, do not execute auto gradation correction as yet.) 3. Execute ‘FUNC>INSTALL (2nd page)>NLSET-K’ in service mode. (about 1 min) 4.
SERVICE MODE INSTALL DISP COUNTER SGNL-C SGNL-M xxx ADJUST REF-C FUNC SIGG-C 3/4 xxx REF-Y xxx xxx SGNL-Y xxx REF-M SIGG-M xxx xxx SIGG-Y xxx xxx OPTION TEST F00-400-03 SGNL-C/M/Y Remarks Indicates the value of the toner density signal when INIT is executed as ATR control. Be sure to record the reading on the label. For SGNL-C, SGNL-M, and SGNL-Y, normally, 818 ±41.
SERVICE MODE INSTALL 4/4 ADJUST SGNL-S-C xxx REF-S-C SGNL-S-M xxx REF-S-M SGNL-S-Y xxx REF-S-Y SGNL-S-K xxx REF-S-K FUNC xxx SGNL-D-C xxx SGNL-D-M xxx SGNL-D-K xxx SIGG-S-C xxx xxx SIGG-S-M xxx xxx SGNL-D-Y xxx SIGG-S-Y xxx DISP COUNTER OPTION xxx SIGG-S-K xxx TEST F00-400-04 SGNL-S-C/M/Y/K Indicates the value of the SALT signal. Be sure to record the reading on the label. REF-S-C/M/Y/K Indicates the value of the SALT reference signal.
SERVICE MODE R-CON DISP COUNTER ADJUST RAM-CLR 1/2 READY CHK-SUM RCON xxxx FUNC OPTION TEST F00-400-05 RAM-CLR Remarks Clears the all data of RAM on the reader controller PCB and sets the standard value. The power switch will automatically turn off when ‘RAM-CLR’ is executed. The contents of the RAM are replaced with the initial settings when the power switch is turned on thereafter.
SERVICE MODE DC-CON DISP READY CHK-SUM COUNTER ADJUST 1/5 RAM-CLR DCCON xxxx FUNC OPTION TEST F00-400-06 RAM-CLR Remarks Clears the all data of RAM on the DC controller PCB and sets the standard value.
SERVICE MODE DC-CON DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC UP-A4R xxxx LOW-A4R xxxx MF-A4R xxxx 2/5 UP-STMR xxxx LOW-STMR xxxx MF-A6R xxxx READY MF-A4 xxxx OPTION TEST F00-400-07 ■ Entering Backup Data If you have executed ‘RAM-CLR’ for the DC controller PCB, use this screen to enter the data recorded on the service label. UP-A4R Enters the adjustment value for paper width detection reference point 1 for cassette 1.
SERVICE MODE DC-CON DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC SGNL-C xxxx REF-C xxxx SIGG-C xxxx 3/5 SGNL-M xxxx REF-M xxxx SIGG-M xxxx READY SGNL-Y xxxx REF-Y xxxx SIGG-Y xxxx OPTION TEST F00-400-08 ■ Entering Backup Data If you have executed ‘RAM-CLR’ for the DC controller PCB, use this screen to enter the data recorded on the service label. SGNL-C/M/Y Enters the value of the toner density signal when INIT is executed as ATR control.
SERVICE MODE DC-CON DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC OPTION SGNL-S-C xxxx REF-S-C xxxx SGNL-D-C xxxx SIGG-S-C xxxx TEST 4/5 SGNL-S-M xxxx REF-S-M xxxx SGNL-D-M xxxx SIGG-S-M xxxx PUDT-L xxxx READY SGNL-S-Y xxxx REF-S-Y xxxx SGNL-D-Y xxxx SIGG-S-Y xxxx PUDT-U xxxx SGNL-S-K xxxx REF-S-K xxxx SGNL-D-K xxxx SIGG-S-K xxxx PTOFST-K xxxx F00-400-09 ■ Entering Backup Data If you have executed ‘RAM-CLR’ for the DC controller PCB, use this screen to enter the data recorded on the service label.
SERVICE MODE DC-CON DISP COUNTER ADJUST 5/5 P-TH-1 XXXX C-OFST X P-TH-2 XXXX Y-OFST X POTOFSTC XX POTOFSTM XX READY SNSR-RNK A K-OFST X FUNC OPTION POTOFSTY XX POTOFSTK XX TEST F00-400-10 ■ Entering Backup Data If you have executed ‘RAM-CLR’ for the DC controller PCB, use this screen to enter the data recorded on the service label. P-TH-1/2 Enters the output characteristics of the paper thickness sensor set at time of shipment from the factory.
SERVICE MODE CCD DISP COUNTER 1/2 READY AP-TYPE xxxx AUTO-ADJ LAMP ADJUST xxxx FUNC OPTION CCD-MODE 0 TEST CCD-DISP 0 CCD DISP COUNTER GAIN-UP 2/2 BLUE READY GREEN xxxx ADJUST OFST-O BLUE FUNC OFST-E BLUE OPTION GAIN-O BLUE TEST GAIN-E BLUE RED xxxx GREEN xxxx xxxx RED xxxx GREEN xxxx RED xxxx xxxx xxxx RED GREEN xxxx xxxx GREEN xxxx xxxx RED xxxx xxxx F00-400-11 AUTO-ADJ Remarks Use it to
SERVICE MODE CCD-DISP Use it to switch the display data for the following in service mode: ‘FUNC>CCD’ 0: indicate display in normal mode (default) 1: indicate data in precious metal mode TARGET Use it to display the shading adjustment correction value (target value of point B). BLUE Use it to indicate the data of BLUE. GREEN Use it to indicate the data of GREEN. RED Use it to indicate the data of RED.
SERVICE MODE PRJ-ADJ DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC PRJ-LAMP NEGA-B xxxx POSI-B xxxx PRJ-CCD xxxx NEGA-G xxxx POSI-G xxxx READY NEGA-R xxxx POSI-R xxxx OPTION TEST F00-400-13 PRJ-LAMP Keeps the lamp of the film projector ON for 1 min. (A press on the PRJLAMP key turns it off.) PRJ-CCD Adjusts the gain for the CCD and reads the appropriate data for installation work.
SERVICE MODE POSI-B *1 POSI-G POSI-R Adjusts the target value for shading correction when making copies of positive film using the film projector. • A lower value will make the images darker. B→Y G→M R→C Settings range –100~+100 Note 1: You must enter the appropriate value whenever you have replaced the reader controller PCB or initialized a RAM; record any new values on the service label for this purpose. COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
SERVICE MODE Screen for Y LASER-Y DISP COUNTER 1/2POWER 0 3/4 READY POWER BIAS-Y 0 0 ADJUST 400-P00 FUNC 800-P00 400-PFF 0 266-P00 266-PFF 0 0 800-PFF 0 0 0 OPTION TEST Screen for M/C (screen for M is shown) LASER-M DISP COUNTER ADJUST 1/2POWER 0 200-P00 0 2/4 POWER BIAS-M 0 200-PFF 0 400-P00 0 FUNC 400-PFF 0 0 800-PFF 800-P00 0 0 OPTION TEST Screen for Bk LASER-K DISP COUNTER 1/2POWER 0 4
SERVICE MODE 1/2POWER Remarks Turns ON the laser output for laser power minimum value adjustment. A press on the Stop key will turn off the laser output. POWER Remarks Turns ON the laser output for laser power maximum value adjustment. A press on the Stop key will turn off the laser output. BIAS-(C, M, Y, K) Remarks Turns ON the laser output for laser power bias value adjustment. A press on the Stop key will turn off the laser output.
SERVICE MODE P-UP-TMG DISP COUNTER DATA-U PK-ADJ-U PK-ADJ-L FUNC PK-ADJ-D OPTION MF-SKEW DATA-L 0 0 0 D-SEND-L 0 0 D-SEND-D PUDT-D 0 D-SEND-U 0 PUDT-L DATA-D 0 PUDT-U 0 0 ADJUST 0 0 0 TEST F00-400-15 PK-ADJ-U/L Use it to execute automatic pick-up from the upper/lower cassette, thereby obtaining the pick-up timing adjustment value.
SERVICE MODE ATTRACT DISP COUNTER ATT-SLCT 0 ADJUST ATT-ON 0 FUNC OPTION TEST F00-400-16 ATT-SLCT Selects the source of paper for checking the point of retention. Source of paper 1 Upper cassette 2 Lower cassette 3 Paper deck 4 Multifeeder 5 Duplexing pick-up assembly Use A4/LTR paper for the mode. ATT-ON Starts operations according to the settings under ATT-SLCT, and stops automatically with paper retained on the transfer belt.
SERVICE MODE EPC DISP COUNTER 1/2 EPC V V00-300V-C XX VFF-300V-C XX V00-700V-C XX VFF-700V-C XX ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST EPC DISP V00-300V-Y XX VFF-300V-Y XX V00-700V-Y XX VFF-700V-Y XX V00-300V-M XX VFF-300V-M XX V00-700V-M XX VFF-700V-M XX 2/2 READY V00-300V-K XX VFF-300V-K XX V00-700V-K XX VFF-700V-K XX COUNTER ADJUST EPC-C EPC-M EPC-Y EPC-K FUNC xxx POTOFSTC xxx xxx POTOFSTM xxx xxx POTOFS
SERVICE MODE V00-700V Remarks Indicates the photosensitive drum surface potential when the grid bias potential of the primary charging assembly is –700 V and the laser output is V00. Approximate value: 650~750 VFF-300V Remarks Indicates the photosensitive drum surface potential when the grid bias potential of the primary charging assembly is –300 V and the laser output is VFF.
SERVICE MODE DISP COUNTER BLD-SLCT BLD-ON 0 0 ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST F00-400-18 BLD-SLCT Use it to determine the combination of ways to operate the transfer blade and the transfer belt cleaning blade. • Press ‘BLD-SLCT’, enter a number on the keypad, and press the ‘OK’ key.
SERVICE MODE FUSER NIP-CHK UPPER-CR ADJUST E000-RLS LOWER-CR FUNC E005-RLS DISP COUNTER READY OPTION TEST F00-400-19 NIP-CHK Remarks Measures the fixing assembly nip. Paper is stopped once at the point of fixing and then delivered. Sine the operation uses cassette 1 as the source of paper, ‘NO PAPER’ will be indicated over ‘P’ if no paper exists in cassette 1. The notation changes to ‘READY’ when paper is supplied.
SERVICE MODE LOWER-CR Use it to adjust the fixing temperature value (lower roller). If you have replaced the fixing assembly, enter the value recorded on the label attached to the fixing assembly. Thereafter, be sure to turn off and then on the power switch. Settings range –3 ~ +3 (At time of shipment: 0) Do not enter a value other than the one indicated on the label. S-102 COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
SERVICE MODE CST-AD DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC UP-A4R xxxx LOW-A4R xxxx MF-A4R xxxx UP-STMR xxxx LOW-STMR xxxx MF-A6R xxxx READY xxxx xxxx MF-A4 xxxx xxxx OPTION TEST F00-400-20 UP-A4R Executes automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 1 for cassette 1. UP-STMR Executes automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 2 for cassette 1.
SERVICE MODE F-MISCs READY LED-CHK LED-OFF ADJUST LCD-CHK PRESS STOP KEY FUNC KEY-CHK DISP COUNTER KEY-OFF SC-MOVE 0/4 LAMP-ON 0 TEST RESERVE1 0 RESERVE2 0 RESERVE3 0 RESERVE4 0 0 OPTION FILT-IMG DEMO 0 F00-400-21 LED-CHK Starts an activation check on the LED. LED-OFF Starts an activation check on the LED. LCD-CHK Remarks Starts an activation check on the LCD. (The notation becomes highlighted.
SERVICE MODE User Mode Cover Transparency Insert Start Pre-Heat Interrupt Clear ID Call M N O START STAND BY INTERRUPT CLEAR ID CALL KEY-OFF Ends the input check on the key. SC-MOVE Starts a check on the scanner. Each press on SC-MOVED changes the notation and the operation as follows: Notation 0/4 1/4 2/4 3/4 Operation HP A→B B→C C→HP T00-400-05 HP A B C F00-400-22 LAMP-ON Remarks Starts a check on the scanning lamp.
SERVICE MODE F-MISCp DISP COUNTER IO 1/2 READY IO-ON 1 SHV ADJUST SHV-ON MTR 1 FUNC FAN MTR-ON DRM-ROT 1 FAN-ON 1 OPTION TEST F-MISCp DISP COUNTER 2/2 E075-RLS SHUT-OFF ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST F00-400-23 IO Use it to select the type of IO (input/output) check. See the details section. IO-ON Use it to start an IO (input/output) check.
SERVICE MODE MRT-ON Use it to start a check on the motor. Press the Stop key to stop the operation. FAN Remarks Use it to select the type of check on the fan. Enter a number on the keypad, and press the OK key. See the details section in FAN. FAN-ON Use it to start a check on the fan. Press the Stop key to stop the operation. DRM-ROT Use it to cause the drum to rotate idly for 10 min. Press the Stop key to stop. Be sure to release the transfer belt before execution. E075/RLS Use it to clear ‘E075’.
SERVICE MODE ■ Details of IO No.
SERVICE MODE ■ Details of SHV No. High-voltage output Control 1 Primary C charging assembly, grid C output, auxiliary high-voltage Y (–350 µA), developing bias CDC (–370 V) output Transfer lifter DOWN, photosensitive drum motor ON, pre-exposure ON, primary C output, grid C output (500 V), auxiliary highvoltage output C (–350 µA), developing bias CDC (–370 V) output IB (Waits for a stop command, or 60 sec.
SERVICE MODE No.
SERVICE MODE ■ Details of MTR No. Motor Control 1 M10 (Multifeeder pickup motor) *1 Operates for 10 sec, stops for 3 sec, and then operates for 10 sec and stops. 2 M21 (photosensitive drum motor) *1 Operates for 10 sec, stops for 3 sec, and then operates for 10 sec and stops. 3 M4 (laser scanner motor) *1 Operates for 10 sec, stops for 3 sec, and then operates for 10 sec and stops. 4 M20 (waste toner feed motor) *1 Operates for 10 sec, stops for 3 sec, and then operates for 10 sec and stops.
SERVICE MODE No.
SERVICE MODE No.
SERVICE MODE ■ Details of FAN Type Fan 1 Laser cooling fan (FM4, front; FM5, rear) 2 Primary suction fan (FM8, left; FM9, right) 3 Primary exhaust fan (FM6) 4 Pre-fixing feeding fan (FM7) 5 9 Pre-fixing feeding fan (FM7) low-speed rotation Delivery assembly exhaust fan 1 (FM1), 2 (FM2), 3 (FM3) high-speed rotation Delivery assembly exhaust fan 1 (FM1), 2 (FM2), 3 (FM3) low-speed rotation Delivery lower cooling fan1 (FM19) Delivery lower cooling fan2 (FM20) Delivery lower cooling fan3 (FM27) Del
SERVICE MODE TCLN DISP ADJUST COUNTER READY READY KCLN OCLN FUNC OPTION TEST F00-400-24 KCLN Remarks Use it to bring the polishing roller in contact while moving the transfer belt. The operation will stop after last rotating sequence. (for about 30 sec). During operation, the notation is ‘P’ SERVICE. Stops automatically after operating for a specific period of time.
SERVICE MODE P-THICK DISP COUNTER ADJUST READY P-TH-1 XXXX P-TH-2 XXXX P-TH-DATA XXXX FUNC OPTION SNSR-RNK A TEST F00-400-25 P-TH-1/2 Indicates the output characteristics of the paper thickness sensor set at time of shipment from the factory. SNSR-RNK Remarks Enters the characteristics (A through E) of the paper thickness sensor to be installed newly. Values A through E change by toggle operation.
SERVICE MODE IMG-REG DISP COUNTER 1/2 READY AUTO-ADJ 0 ADJUST FUNC M-READ XXX M-WR-F XXX M-WR-R XXX OPTION TEST C-REG-H XXX Y-REG-H XXX K-REG-H XXX C-REG-HS X Y-REG-HS X K-REG-HS X C-REG-V XXX Y-REG-V XXX K-REG-V XXX F00-400-26 AUTO-ADJ Remarks Use it to execute the series of operations for image position correction control. READY→SERVICE→READY 1 min (approx.
SERVICE MODE Y/C/K-REG-HS Use it to correct the write start position of the pattern for Y/C/K. (fine adjusment in main scanning divection) Do not use this item unless ‘E194’ is indicated (error that disables image position correction). Settings range 0 ~ 3 Standard: Unit: 0 1/4 pixel Y/C/K-REG-V Use it to correct the write start position of the pattern for Y/C/K. (fine adjustment in main scanning direction) Use it to correct the write start position of the pattern for Y/C/K.
SERVICE MODE IMG-REG DISP COUNTER REG-ERR-FLG 2/2 0: 0000 4: 0000 READY 1: 0000 5: 0000 2: 0000 6: 0000 3: 0000 7: 0000 ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST F00-400-29 REG-ERR-FLG Indicates how the image position correction pattern is read. 0:0000 through 7:0000 corresponds to 8 sets of patterns. (‘0000’ indicates the absence of an error; if an error is found in all 8 sets, ‘E194’ will be indicated. If any of the sets is ‘0000’, its data will be used for correction.
SERVICE MODE 5 OPTION (options mode) DISP COUNTER READY READY R-OPT ADJUST P-OPT REMOTE FUNC DECK DATA-CON OPTION TEST F00-500-01 1 2 3 4 5 S-120 R-OPT P-OPT REMOTE DECK DATA-CON Selects reader-related machine settings. Adjusts the cleaning mode transfer drum stop position. Sets conditions for connection with an external controller. Sets conditions for connection with a paper deck. Use it to disconnect the copy Data Controller-A1 DA unit-A1. COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
SERVICE MODE R-OPT DISP COUNTER P-SIZE READY THIN-APS MANAGE 0 READY 0 0 ADJUST FUNC METAL 0 OPTION CONTROL 0 OHP-MODE 0 SMP-NUM 0 TEST F00-500-02 P-SIZE*1 Settings Identifies the size of paper and transparency film of the copier. 0: AB-configuration 1: Inch-configuration 2: A-configuration 3: All METAL*1 Settings Determines whether to use or not metal mode in user mode.
SERVICE MODE Caution EX 1 If the setting is ‘2’, When the control key is turned off, black-and-white printing/color printing is enabled. When the control card is not inserted, none is enabled. When the ID No. is not entered, none is enabled. EX 2 If the setting is ‘431’, When the control key is turned off, none is enabled. When the card is not inserted, black-and-white copying is enabled. When the ID No. is not entered, black-and-white copying/black-andwhite printing/color printing is enabled.
SERVICE MODE MANAGE Settings Use it to bring the hues closer to those of professional printing. If ‘MANAGE’ is set to ‘1’, the Pro Print key will be indicated on the user mode screen. 0: Standard 1: Professional printing (standard: 1) For fine-adjustment, see the descriptions for ‘AJDUST>COL-ADJ>PTBL-M/C/Y/K’ OHP-MODE Settings Select the maximum density when making a copy outo a transparencies. 0~2 (Standard: 0) If the value is increased, the density becomes darker.
SERVICE MODE P-OPT DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC T-WEB 0 F-WEB-MD 0 PSTCL-ON 0 READY TBLT-POS 0 READY AUTO-REG 0 F-WEB 0 REG-NEXT 0 OPTION TEST F0-500-03 T-WEB *1 Changes the frequency at which the transfer belt cleaning web turns on. Settings range 1~5 (Standard: 3) TBLT-POS *1 Changes the stop position of the transfer belt.
SERVICE MODE REG-NEXT Settings Remarks Use it to delay the timing at which the first sheet of paper is picked up to prevent lines in main scanning direction near 188 mm from the leading edge of paper. 0: normal operation 1: delay pickup timing (standard: 0) The potential on the transfer belt is not stable when the first copy is made, with the photosensitive drum at times developing paper traces (drum memory) caused by the leading edge of paper.
SERVICE MODE REMOTE DISP COUNTER READY READY REMOTE 0 ADJUST P-PRT-MF 0 FUNC OPTION TEST F00-500-04 REMOTE Settings Use it to set priorities on parameters selected by the controller. 0: Use only the settings made on the copier’s control panel. For the items that can be selected only on the controller, the factory settings will be used.
SERVICE MODE DECK DISP COUNTER DECK-SET READY READY DECK-P 1 A4 ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST F00-500-05 DECK-SET *1 Settings Specifies the presence/absence of a paper deck. 0: Absent 1: A4PD 2: A3PD Standard: 1 DECK-P *1 Settings Note 1: Selects the size of paper used in the paper deck. Each press on the key scans through the sizes.
SERVICE MODE DATA-CON DISP COUNTER READY READY USER B-CLR 0 ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST F00-500-06 B-CLR Remarks S-128 Connecting the Copy Data Controller-A1/DA unit-A1 will automatically sets it to ‘1’. Be sure to set it to ‘0’ when temporarily separating the Copy Data Controller-A1/DA unit-A1 during service work.
SERVICE MODE 6.TEST (test print) DISP COUNTER READY READY READY PG ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST F00-600-01 PG DISP COUNTER TXPH READY THRU TYPE 0 ADJUST DENS-C 0 DENS-M xxx 0 DENS-Y xxx DENS-K xxx xxx FUNC OPTION COLOR-C COLOR-M 0 COLOR-Y 0 COLOR-K 0 0 TEST F00-600-02 TXPH Operation Switches between text mode and photo mode.
SERVICE MODE TYPE Remarks Selects the type of test print.
SERVICE MODE 7.COUNTER (counter) DISP ADJUST FUNC OPTION TEST COUNTER READY READY <001> <011> <021> <002> <003> <004> <005> <006> <007> <008> <009> <010> <012> <013> <022> <014> <015> <016> <017> <018> <019> <020> <023> <024> <025> <026> <027> <028> <029> <030> <031> <032> <033> <034> <035> <036> <037> <038> <039> <040> F00-700-01 • • • After 999999, the reading returns to 000000.
SERVICE MODE Item Description Item Description 001 Indicates the number of times the Y developing assembly has been used. Indicates the number of times the M developing assembly has been used. Indicates the number of times the C developing assembly has been used. Indicates the number of times the Bk developing assembly has been used. Indicates the number of Y-mono copies. Indicates the number of M-mono copies. Indicates the number of C-mono copies. Indicates the number of Bk-mono copies.
SERVICE MODE DRBL-1 DISP COUNTER ADJUST FUNC OPTION SCN-LMP PR-CLN-U PR-CLN-L TR-BLD-C TR-BLD-M TR-BLD-Y TR-BLD-K TR-BLT 1/6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 READY / / / / / / / / 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 READY USER 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% TEST F00-700-02 The machine is equipped with corsumables counters (DRBL-1/DRBL-2/PRDC-1), proriding references for parts replaced on a periodical basis or parts requiring replacement. EX.
SERVICE MODE PT-DRM-M PT-DRM-Y PT-DRM-K CLN-BLD the number of copies passed through the drum(M) the number of copies passed through the drum(Y) the number of copies passed through the drum(K) the number of copies passed through the transfer cleaning blade DV-UNT-C the number of copies passed through the developing cylinder(C) DV-UNT-M the number of copies passed through the developing cylinder(M) DV-UNT-Y the number of copies passed through the developing cylinder(Y) DV-UNT-K the number of copies passed th
SERVICE MODE PRM-GR-M the number of copies passed through the primary grid wire(M) PRM-GR-Y the number of copies passed through the primary grid wire(Y) PRM-GR-K the number of copies passed through the primary grid wire(K) PRM-UT-C the number of copies passed through the primary charging assembly(C) PRM-UT-M the number of copies passed through the primary charging assembly(M) PRM-UT-Y the number of copies passed through the primary charging assembly(Y) PRM-UT-K the number of copies passed through the primar
Error Code COPYRIGHT©2001CANONINC.2000CANONCLC5000REV.0JAN.
CONTENTS Contents Self Diagnosis ........................................ E-1 RDF ..................................................... E-20 Sorter ................................................... E-22 Projector .............................................. E-25 Fan Error .............................................. E-26 COPYRIGHT© 2001 CANON INC. 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
CONTENTS Blank page ii COPYRIGHT© 2001 CANON INC. 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
ERROR CODE Self Diagnosis CPU on the CLC5000’s image processor and DC controller PCB is equipped with a mechanism to check the condition of the machine (sensors, in particular). The mechanism runs a check as necessary and indicates the presence of an error upon detection. See the tables that follow for descriptions of codes; you may check these codes using ‘JAM/ERROR’ under ‘DISPLAY’ in service mode. ‘0001’ will be used for the detailed code column of errors without a detailed code.
ERROR CODE Cause The oil heater thermistor or the oil thermistor has a short circuit; the AC driver PCB is faulty; or the DC controller PCB is faulty. Description Cause 0061 The oil thermistor has detected overheating (180°C). 0071 The oil thermistor has detected overheating (220°C). 0081 The high-temperature detection circuit on the DC controller PCB has detected overheating (190°C for the oil thermistor output; 230°C for the oil heater thermistor).
ERROR CODE E006 Cause • • • Fixing drawer connector (fault) Fixing lever switch (SW5; fault) DC controller PCB (fault) Description 0001 The fixing drawer connector connection signal CONNECT goes ‘0’ when the front cover is closed (i.e., the cover connector is disconnected). 0002 The fixing lever switch signal F-KBLK goes ‘1’ when the front cover is closed (i.e., the releasing lever is not set).
ERROR CODE E017 Cause • • Duplex feeding motor (M19; faulty) DC controller PCB (faulty) Description The rotation speed of the duplex feeding motor has deviated from a specific value for 0.1 sec or more (PLL signal ‘0’). E018 Cause • • Polishing/oil removing motor (M15; faulty) DC controller PCB (faulty) Description The rotation speed of the polishing/oil removing motor has deviated from a specific value for 0.1 sec or more. E020 Cause Description Cause The descriptions are by detail Code.
ERROR CODE E020 Cause xx40 When setting initial data (upon installation, for example), the average value after sampling of the following values is 848 or higher: SGNL-S-C, SGNL-S-M, SGNL-S-Y, SGNL-S-K; or, the value of SGNL-S-K is 352 or higher. xx41 When setting initial data (upon installation, for example), the average value after sampling of the following values is 848 or higher: REF-S-C, REF-S-M, REF-S-Y, REF-S-K; or, the value of REF-S-K is 544 or higher.
ERROR CODE E020 Cause Description Cause xx4D During copying sequence, the average value after sampling of the following values is 336 or lower: REF-S-C, REF-S-M, REF-S-Y; or, the value of REF-S-K is 464 or lower. SALT sensor (fault) xx4F The value of ‘SGNL-S-C/M/Y/K’, which has been obtained by averaging samplings during copying sequence is 1008 or more.
ERROR CODE E020 Cause Description Cause xx85 During copying sequence, the initial setting for the following is 512 or lower because of an error in the memory back-up data: SGNL-S-C, SGNL-S-M, SGNL-S-Y; or, the value of SGNL-S-K is 144 or lower. xx86 During copying sequence, the initial setting of the following is 336 or lower because of an error in the memory back-up data: REF-S-C, REF-S-M, REF-S-Y; or the value of REF-S-K is 464 or lower.
ERROR CODE E020 Cause xxB1 When setting initial data, the average after sampling of the following values is 859 or higher: REF-C, REF-M, REF-Y xxB2 When setting initial data, the average after sampling of the following values is 255.
ERROR CODE E020 Cause • • • • • Developer (deterioration) Developing cylinder (rotation failure) Toner density sensor (faulty) Developer (inside developing assembly; stirring fault) Toner level sensor (faulty) Description xxD0 The value of the toner supply time correction data based on ‘SGNL-C/M/Y’ is 141 or more for 20 copies or more during copying sequence. xxE0 The value of the toner supply time correction data based on ‘SGNL-C/M/Y’ is -188 or less for 20 copies or more during copying sequence.
ERROR CODE E040 Cause Description Cause The cassette lifter motor is faulty, or the DC controller PCB is faulty. 0001 The error detection circuit on the DC controller PCB has detected overcurrent in the upper cassette lifter motor drive circuit. 0002 The error detection circuit on the DC controller PCB has detected overcurrent in the lower cassette lifter motor drive circuit.
ERROR CODE E050 Cause • • • Duplex paper jogging guide motor (M23; faulty) Duplex paper jogging guide home position sensor (PS29; faulty) DC controller PCB (faulty) Description 0001 The duplexing unit stacking guide home position sensor (PS29) does not turn ON within 4 sec after the duplex paper jogging guide motor (M23) has turned ON. 0002 The duplex paper jogging guide home position sensor (PS29) remains ON for 1 sec or more after the duplexing unit stacking guide motor (M23) has turned ON.
ERROR CODE E061 Cause • • Primary charging assembly (faulty) HVDC (faulty) Description Cause xx11 The measurement of VD1 is 900 V or higher and, in addition, the measurement of VD2 is 900 V or higher. • Video controller PCB (faulty) • Laser unit (faulty) Description Cause xx12 The measurement of VD1 is 200 V or lower and, in addition, the measurement of VD2 is 600 V or lower. xx13 The measurement of VD1 is 150 V or lower and, in addition, the measurement of VD2 is 300 V or lower.
ERROR CODE E061 Cause • • • • • • Laser unit (faulty) Laser shutter (faulty) Photosensitive drum (faulty) Scanner (faulty) Video controller PCB (faulty) Laser intensity (adjustment faulty) Description Cause xx20 The computation value of V00 is the upper limit value (800 V) or higher. xx21 The computation value (750 V) of Vdc is the upper limit value (750 V) or higher. xx22 The computation value of Vg is the upper limit value (950 V) or higher.
ERROR CODE E061 Description Cause xx30 The measurement of VD1 is 400 V or higher. xx31 The measurement of VD1 is 200 V or lower. xx32 The measurement of VD2 is 800 V or higher. xx33 The measurement of VD2 is 500 V or lower. xx34 The measurement of VL1 is 200 V or higher. xx35 The measurement of VL2 is 400 V or more. xx36 The measurement of VL2 is 0 V or lower.
ERROR CODE E062 Cause Description Cause Drum Temperature Control Fault xx=00: common error xx=01: C xx=02: M xx=03: Y xx=04: Bk • DC controller PCB (faulty) • AC driver (faulty) Description Cause Description xx01 The drum temperature is 57°C or more for 0.5 sec or more. xx02 The drum temperature has dropped below 15°C or less after it has reached a specific temperature. Drum thermistor (faulty) 0010 The drum thermistor has an open circuit or a short circuit.
ERROR CODE E074 Cause • • • Transfer belt lifter sensor 1 (PS12), 2 (PS13) Transfer belt lifter clutch (CL17; faulty) DC controller PCB (faulty) Description The transfer belt lifter sensor 1 (PS12) or 2 (PS13) does not go ‘1’ (ON) within a specific period of time after the transfer belt lifter clutch (CL17) has turned ON.
ERROR CODE E077 Cause The transfer belt waste toner motor is faulty; the connection between the moor and the DC controller PCB is faulty; or the DC controller PCB is faulty. Description 0001 The error detection circuit on the DC controller PCB has detected overcurrent in the transfer belt waste toner motor drive circuit.
ERROR CODE E220 Cause The scanning lamp has deteriorated or has an open circuit; the lamp regulator PCB is faulty; or the reader controller PCB is faulty. Description The lamp does not turn on 500 msec after the scanning lamp ON signal has been generated. Or, the lamp fails to turn off 500 msec after the scan ning lamp OFF signal has been generated. E226 Cause Description The reader suction fan (FM12/13) is faulty. The reader suction fan (FM12/13) has stopped to rotate.
ERROR CODE E350 Cause Description ECO-ID PCB (faulty) • The ECO-ID PCB is not mounted. • The connection between ECO-ID PCB and reader controller PCB is faulty. During the power switch has been turned ON, the communication between ECO-ID PCB and the reader controller is not normal. E351 Cause Description Image processor PCB (faulty) The communication within the image processor PCB is faulty.
ERROR CODE RDF The CPU on the RDF controller PCB is equipped with a mechanism to check the condition of the machine (sensors, in particular). The mechanism runs a check as necessary and indicates on the copier’s control panel the presence of an error upon detection. E400 Cause Description Data communication with copier (faulty) Communication with the copier is monitored at all times. The communication is disrupted for 5 sec or more.
ERROR CODE E405 Cause • • Pick-up motor (M1; faulty) Pick-up motor clock sensor (S12; faulty) Description The number of pick-up motor clock pulses is below a specific value for 200 ms. E407 Cause • • Pick-up motor (M6; faulty) Tray position sensor (S25; faulty) Description The sensor state does not change even the tray ascent motor is driven for 2 sec or more.
ERROR CODE Sorter E510 Cause There is no clock signal from the clock sensor (P15) of the feeding motor for 250 ms or more. Description There is no clock signal from the clock sensor (P15) of the feeding motor fopr 250 ms or more. E516 Cause Description Low-speed feeding motor (M10; rotation failure) There is no clock signal from the clock sensor (P123) of the feeding motor for 250 ms or more. E517 Cause The locking cam home position for the buffer pass unit cannot be de tected.
ERROR CODE 0012 The lower cam solenoid 2 is damaged, the lower cam sensor 2 is damaged, or the position of the lower cam sensor light-blocking plate is faulty. 0013 Either lower cam solenoid 1 or 2 is damaged , both lower cam sensors 1 and 2 are damaged, or the position of the lower cam sensor light-blocking plate is faulty. 0014 Either or both of the upper cam solenoids are damaged, or the position of the lower cam sensors light-blocking plate is faulty.
ERROR CODE E531 Cause Description Stapler unit drive motor (M4; rotation failure) • The operation does not end within 2000 ms after the motor drive signal has been generated. • There is no clock signal from the clock sensor (P18) of the motor for 250 ms or more. • The input signal from the shifting home position sensor (P19) for 1000 ms or more.
ERROR CODE Projector E634 Cause Description Film projector lamp (faulty) See the Service Manual for the film projector. E718 Cause • • IP-MAIN PCB (faulty) Film projector controller PCB (faulty) Description The communication between the IP-MAIN PCB and the film projector is interrupted for 5 sec or more. E800 Cause • • • Power switch DC controller PCB DC harness Description An interruption in the auto shut-off signal is detected for 1 sec or more. COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
ERROR CODE Fan Error E804 Cause Description Power supply unit (DCP1) cooling fan FM 17/18 (error) 0001 The rotation of the cooling fan for the power supply unit (DCP1) has stopped. E805 Cause Description Cause Description The delivery assembly exhaust fan (FM1/2/3) is faulty. 0001 The delivery assembly exhaust fan (FM1/2/3) has stopped to rotate. The general exhaust fan (FM21/22/23) is faulty. 0001 The general exhaust fan (FM21/22/23) has stopped to rotate.
ERROR CODE Cause Description Cause Description Cause Description The fixing heat discharge fan (FM31) is faulty. 0004 The fixing heat discharge fan (FM31) is faulty. The delivery cooling fan (FM34) is faulty. 0005 The delivery cooling fan (FM34) has stopped to rotate. The pre-fixing exhaust fan (FM35/36) is faulty. 0006 The pre-fixing exhaust fan (FM35/36) has stopped to rotate. E824 Cause Description Cause Description The primary exhaust fan (FM6) is faulty.
ERROR CODE • Clearing E000 1) Start service mode, and select ‘FUSER’ under ‘FUNC’. 2) Press ‘E000-RLS’. 3) Turn off and then on the power switch. • Clearing E005 1) Start service mode, and select ‘FUSER’ under ‘FUNC’. 2) Press ‘E005-RLS’. 3) Turn off and then on the power switch. • Clearing E075 1) Start service mode, and select ‘F-MISCp’ under ‘FUNC’. 2) Press ‘E075-RLS’. 3) Turn off and then on the power switch. • Clearing ‘E004’ 1) Turn off the power switch.
Prepared by Office Imaging Products Quality Assurance Center CANON INC. Printed in Japan REVISION 0 (JAN. 2001) (23715/26168/36086/36850) 5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan COPYRIGHT© 2001 CANON INC. 2000 20000 2000 CANON CLC5000 REV.0 JAN.
This publication is printed on 100% reprocessed paper. PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 0200GR1.